Home
        User's Guide
         Contents
1.                      Modifying Data and Adding Rows    The Grid allows you to directly change database data by changing the values in the grid cells  You can  also add rows to your table with the Grid  You must have the proper table permissions to affect the  database data     See To set preferences for PCC Window Views  Grid Tasks  and Assigning Permissions Tasks     Records Affected and Scrolling    TheGrid caches results locally and initially retrieves 100 records  The Grid displays as many records as  its vertical size permits     As you scroll the vertical scroll bar  more records are retrieved and made availableto the Grid  The  number of records retrieved appears in the lower right corner of the main window     27      Fetched 1 315 Rows       Once you scroll to the bottom  the rows fetched indicator reports the total number of records returned  by the SQL statement     Text Window View    PCC provides a command to execute an individual SQL statement in SQL Editor so that the results  appear in the Text view  The command is called Executein Text and can beinvoked from the SQL menu  or from atoolbar button     The Text window view is automatically used for the results of any SQL statement that is not a SELECT  statement  For example  suppose you want to delete some records and havetyped aDELETE statement  into SQL Editor  If you select the menu command Executein Grid  SQL Editor returns the results to the  Text window view  not to the Grid window view     A command also
2.       Date fields    The only supported format is yyyy mm dd       Time fields    The only supported format is HH MM SS       Timestamp fields    The only supported format is yyyy mm dd HH MM SS MS       White space and column delimiters    No white space must exist between the column delimiters and the data values        even if the data values are enclosed in quotes        1 BDU is not aware of default values for a column defined during table creation or update             Best Practices    If possible  run BDU when the database load is minimal or when no concurrent sessions exist on the  table being loaded     If the table being loaded contains any indexes  drop the indexes before using BDU  Re create the indexes  after the load is complete     If thetable being loaded contains any columns with check constraints  drop thecheck constraints before  using BDU  Re specify the constraints after the load is complete     Sample Source File    The following content may be used to create a sample delimited text file  You may use the file to verify  the usage examples  The examples refer to the sample file as data_file txt     Note that  because the following content is comma delimited  you must specify the  t parameter   t     with BDU  The t parameter is required for any delimiter except the TAB character     psqlBDUsample 1 12345 psql 101 18446744073709551615  psqlBDUsample 2 12346 psql 102 18446744073709551614  psqlBDUsample 3 12347 psql 103 18446744073709551613  psqlBDUsample 4
3.      3 Next  the File New Database dialog box opens and asks you to name the new database  Name the  database and click Create     37    Using PSQL    4 From the Access menu  choose   File  gt  Get External Data  gt  Link Tables        Note You have the option to Import data or Link Tables to the new database  When you choose  Import  you break the link to the ODBC data source immediately following the import procedure   Essentially  Import creates a static copy of thedata  When you choose Link Tables  M icrosoft Access  keeps the connection open and remains dependent upon the ODBC data source each time the data  is accessed  This way  the data you see reflects any changes to the data at its source           Note If you wish to link to afile on a local area network  make sure to use a universal naming  convention  UNC  path  instead of relying on the drive letter of a mapped network drive in  Windows Explorer  A drive letter can vary on acomputer or may not always be defined  whereas a  UNC path isareliableand consistent way for M icrosoft Access to locate the data source that contains  the linked table        Figure14 Importing External Data Using Access    El Microsoft Access       Eile Edit View Insert Tools Window Help        yes 0   Be     Bh   to   ste         O new    Ctrl    gt  Open    Ctro  Get External Data  gt  x     Rey               bed Save Gtrl 5  Sa Brrr    Create table in Design view       PI  Create table by using wizard  PI  Create table by entering data  
4.      Caution Indexes must have at least one Column designated  If you do not select a Column for the  Index  the first column remains selected        Thedefault sort order is Ascending  If you need a descending sort order  select Descendingfrom the  Sort Order list for the Column you want changed        Note Partial Indexes are restricted to columns with a data typeof CH AR or VARCHAR and that are  designated as the only or last segment in an Index        6 Continueselecting columns from the list until all the segments are added     Note that a column can be selected for an index only once  Once selected  the column is removed  from thelist of choices because the column has already been designated in the index     7 Click File  gt  Save or  El before changing pages within Table Editor     See also Creating Indexesin PSQL Programmer s Guide  which is part of the PSQL Software    Developer s Kit  SDK       gt  To modify an existing index    Thedatabase engine creates some indexes  such asI DENTITY column indexes and primary key indexes   These indexes are read only and cannot be modified     Table Editor permits you to include an IDENTITY or aSMALLIDENTITY column in the Indexes list if  you have not saved the table  However  the DBM S returns an error when you attempt to save the table   After you deletethel DENTITY or SMALLIDENTITY column from thelist  you may then save the table     1 Ensure that the    Indexes    page of Table Editor is active  If required  perform the steps
5.      DEFAULTDB     DEMODATA  Master                                                                                                           Tables   E Billing     E Class Grid  amp    E Course Dept   E  Nme  Prone Nuber Buin Name   E Faculty Accounting 5126941000   Bhargava Building   E Person Anthropology 5126941100 Billingsley Building  Bann Art 5126941200 Budinszky Building    4 Refinethequery to restrict the results to only departments that start with the letter M by altering the  query at the top half of the screen with the following statement     SELECT   FROM Dept WHERE Name LIKE  M      5 Click the Executein Grid toolbar button or press F9 to display the results of the revised query shown  in Figure 10     Figurel0 Refining Your Query   Dept Tablein DEM ODATA       select   from  Dept  WHERE Name LIKE  M             Grid ES   Text   Dept    Name    Phone Number   Building Name    Mathematics 5126942500 Gambill Building  Music 5126942600 Garrison Hall    You have now obtained data from the remote database engine     For information on advanced operating and maintenance tasks  including database operations  see the  Advanced O perations Guide     35    Using PSQL       Accessing Data via ODBC From Other Applications    This section explains how to access data using Microsoft Access and M icrosoft Excel   The examples covered in this section are       Accessing Data Using Microsoft Excel  a Accessing Data Using Microsoft Access    Before You Begin    Does the Database 
6.      Why do I get a    log in failed    message when I have a Pervasive_Admin group defined or   have  administrator rights     Thesettings for thePSQL services can affect whether or not you have permission to login to themachine  where the database engine is running  The settings apply whether or not you use a Pervasive Admin  group  If you changethe Logon as setting for aPSQL serviceto This account  you must change the user  rights policy Act as part of the operating system for the account  Otherwise  remote log in fails     For example  the Monitoring utility requires that you log in to the operating system on the machine  where the database engine is running  You will receive a message that login failed if the account specified  for This account cannot act as part of the operating system     Note that even the Administrator account requires that you set the user rights policy for Act as part of  the operating system     See Services Settings and Log In Authority for a complete discussion and the steps to change the user  rights policy    User Counts   frequently asked questions about user counts     How do  authorize a User Count Upgrade   Refer to the tasks discussed in the chapter License Administration   How does a PSQL engine using the concurrent user license model keep track of how many    people are accessing the data  If people access the data with two engines at the same time   what happens     With the concurrent user license model  each license specifies a user 
7.      bdu demodata BDU Table C  data_file txt  f 1  1 15  t      190    Command Line Interface Utility Reference    bmon  The bmon utility is documented in Advanced O perations Guide  See Command Line Interface M onitor     191    Command Line Interface U tilities    btadmin    Description   The btadmin utility is used to create and update the flat file btpasswd  which stores user names and  passwords for authentication of PSQ L users  Users given administrator rights can monitor enginestatus  and configure the engine remotely    Synopsis    btadmin    p password   a    a     r  username    Options     p Specify the password  If this option is not specified  you will be prompted to enter the password   at Gives administrator rights for this user   a  Removes administrator rights for this user      r Remove user name from btpasswd file     username  Creates or updates the username in the btpasswa file  If usrname does not exist in this file  an entry is  added  If it does exist  the password is changed     See Also    butil  1     Notes    To administer the engine from a remote workstation  you must supply a user name and password  Upon  initial installation of PSQL v12  the supplied default is admin with an empty password     Use btadmin to add more administrators       btadmin   p password   a   username    192    Command Line Interface Utility Reference    This utility creates a record in btpasswa for user username With password password  if option  p is not used   then you 
8.      gt  To stop the database services on a Windows server using PCC  See To start or stop services      gt  To start the database services on a Windows server using Control Panel  1 IntheWindows Control Panel  double click Administrative Tools then double click Services     A dialog box similar to Figure 1 appears     Figurel Services Dialog Box     ox               Action View  I e      ala    ABS  gt                  Tree         Ra Pervasive PSQL Relational Engine Automatic    Services  Local   Ra Pervasive PSQL Transactional Engine Automatic       Bs Plug and Play Manages d    Started Automatic    a Print Spooler Loads files    Started Automatic  Sy Protected Storage Provides pr    Started Automatic  Sa QoS RSVP Provides n    Manual  Sy Remote Access Auto Connection Ma    Creates a    Manual  4 Remote Access Connection Manager Creates a    Manual  Sa Remote Procedure Call  RPC  Provides th    Started Automatic                        X             2 Right click PSQL Transactional Engine then click Start  Right click PSQL Relational Engine then    click Start      gt  To stop the database services on a Windows server using Control Panel  1 IntheWindows Control Panel  double click Administrative Tools then double click Services     A dialog box similar to Figure 1 appears     Figure2 Services Dialog Box     lolx             e View  I e    aa Ele    gt  mm          Tree            Services  Local  Bs Pervasive PSQL Relational Engine Started Automatic  Bs Pervasive PSQL Trans
9.     Tip You can also insert a column by clicking an existing column row  then pressing Ctrl Insert or  clicking 5   Repeating either action inserts a series of columns in succession           4 Click File  gt  Save or  El before changing pages within Table Editor      gt  To insert a column at the end    1    Ensure that the    Columns    page of Table Editor is active  If required  perform the steps for To work  with columns     2 Right click anywhere on the empty column row below the last existing column row  then click Add      s    Column   or    Click the    Column Name    cell on the empty column row below the last existing column row and  start typing a name for the column     The default name of the inserted column is    columnn     where    n    isa number that automatically  increments by one   The first column you insert is column0  the second column  and so forth         Tip You can also insert a column at the end by clicking or pressing Ctrl Insert     Repeating either action inserts a series of columns in succession  The insert action automatically  adds the new column to the end        3 Click File  gt  Save or  El before changing pages within Table Editor      gt  To select a column or multiple columns    1    Ensure that the    Columns    page of Table Editor is active  If required  perform the steps for To work  with columns     2 Click    the column selection icon on the far left of the column row  for the desired column     To select multiple columns  pres
10.     b  Go to the  restore  directory for DEM ODATA  An  SDF  file exists for each table in  DEM ODATA     c  For each SDF file  use BDU to load the data into the table     For example  to load the data for the  Billing  table usethe following command  Thecommais  the field delimiter in the file     bdu demodata billing billing sdf  t           Note The  t    parameter is required        The BDU utility returns the number of rows of data that were loaded     Miscellaneous       dumped Btrieve records to afileand now   can t read thefile What happened       Howdol run PSQL in trace mode        Howdol run PSQL in trace mode       Does garbage collection occur in the data files and indexes  For example  is space from deleted  records recovered or reused        Isdatabaseshadowingavailable  allowing a complete up to date second copy of the databaseto exist  on another drive or machine     230    Frequently Asked Questions    a What is the mechanism that allows the database to be backed up online  What happens if the server  goes down in the middle of a backup with many open transactions     Installation  Frequently asked questions about installation     Will I lose my data files if   uninstall my existing version of the product  or install a new version   When you uninstall PSQL or install a new version of PSQL  your data files and DDFs are never affected   Even when PSQL System Analyzer archives PSQL files  or even if you have your data files in the same  directory as PSQL files 
11.    Repeat steps 7 and 8 to match each field listed in the    Primary Table Fields    column with afield in  the    Foreign Table Fields    column     Click the desired referential integrity rule  Delete Restrict or Delete Cascade     PSQL allows a circular delete cascade on a table that references itself  Because of this  use delete  cascade with caution  See Delete Restrict and Delete Cascade  both in Advanced Operations Guide     Click File  gt  Save or  El before changing pages within Table Editor     To modify a foreign key    Ensure that the    Foreign Keys    page of Table Editor is active  If required  perform the steps for To  work with foreign keys     Click on the desired foreign key in the Foreign Keys list   The Foreign Keys Details displays     146    Table Editor Tasks    4 Asdesired  select the primary table  match foreign table fields to primary table fields  and set the  referential integrity rule   See steps 5 through 10 in To add a foreign key    5 Click File  gt  Save or  El before changing pages within Table Editor     gt  To delete a foreign key   1 Ensurethat the    Foreign Keys    page of Table Editor is active  If required  perform the steps for To  work with foreign keys    2 Click on the desired foreign key in the Foreign Keys list    3 Click Delete    4 Click Yes to confirm the deletion    5 Click File  gt  Save or  E  before changing pages within Table Editor    SQL View Tasks    gt  To copy SQL statements   1 Ensurethat the   SQL View    page of 
12.    To Display Remaining Authorizations     To Authorize a Key   a To Deauthorize a Key     To Remove Keys Without D eauthorizing    To Repair a Key     To Display Help    Alternative Authorization Tasks   a To Authorize a Key Remotely     To Deauthorize a Key Remotely   a To Authorize a Key Offline     To Deauthorize a Key Offline   a To Authorize a Key Using the PSQL Phone Authorization Wizard   a To Authorize a Key Using the Command line Phone Authorization Utility    110    License Administration T asks    Notification Viewer    To View Licensing M essages In Logging Repositories    GUI Tasks     gt  To Start License Administrator from PSQL Control Center  PCC     1    In PCC  click Tools then License Administrator   License Administrator accesses the selected server to determine the type of license required     If you are not logged in to the server  a dialog appears to log in to the operating system  not the  database engine      Log in with a user name that has administrative privileges on the operating system where the  database engine is running  Once logged in  the server name appears in the License  Administrator title bar and in the Server Name field        Note For servers running a previous version of PSQL  use the license utility provided with that  version of the product        If the server is not the one you want  select a different server as described in To Select a Server for  License Administration    To Start License Administrator as a Stand alone Applica
13.   4    Start PCC if it is not already running   See Starting PCC on Windows    Expand the Engines and Databases nodes in PSQL Explorer   Right click on the database to which you want to add the new table   Click New  gt  Table and type thename for new table        Tip For a list of database object lengths and invalid characters  see Identifier Restrictions by    Identifier Type in Advanced Operations Guide       Note that in thesame directory  no two files should sharethe samefilenameand differ only in their  file name extension  For example  do not create a table  data file  Invoice btr and another one  Invoice mkd in the same directory  This restriction applies because the database engine uses the file  name for various areas of functionality while ignoring the file name extension  Since only the file  name is used to differentiate files  files that differ only in their file name extension look identical to  the database engine     Click Finish     To start Table Editor for an existing table   Start PCC if it is not already running   See Starting PCC on Windows    Expand the Engines and Databases nodes in PSQL Explorer   Right click on the table that you want to modify then click Edit     To work with columns    Perform the steps for To start Table Editor for an existing table or To start Table Editor for anew  table     Click the Columns page tab     To work with indexes    Perform the steps for To start Table Editor for an existing table or To start Table Editor for anew 
14.   5 Inthe Link dialog box  in the Files Of Type box  select ODBC Databases     6 TheSelect Data Source box lists the defined data sources for any ODBC drivers that areinstalled on  your computer  Click the Machine D ata Source tab as shown in the next figure     38    Accessing Data via ODBC From Other Applications    Figure15 Access Display of ODBC Source List    Select Data Source X 1 2  x   File Data Source Machine Data Source      Data Source Name   Type  dBASE Files User  dBase Files   Word User  DeluxeCD User  demodata System Pervasive ODBC Engine Interface  Excel Files User  FoxPro Files   Word User  MS Access Database User  NewData System Pervasive ODBC Engine Interface 7  on c M                    Description              rchmardsta aba m Damiaan ANDO Encino Intake            New       A Machine Data Source is specific to this machine  and cannot be shared    User  data sources are specific to a user on this machine   System  data  sources can be used by all users on this machine  or by a system wide service        7 Select the ODBC data source that you want to link  If the ODBC data source that you selected  requires you to log on  enter your user name and password  additional information might also be  required   and then click OK        Note To define a new data source for any installed ODBC driver  click New  and then follow the  instructions in the Create New Data Source dialog box and the dialog boxes that follow it before  proceeding           Tip If you are l
15.   Can t retrieve database names  You don   t have access rights for the operation    This error may occur when you are attempting to create a new database on the server  The most likely  cause is that you are logged in as an operating system user that has neither administrative rights in the  server operating system  nor membership in the Pervasive Admin group on the server  Another likely  cause is that you forgot to enter a user name and password     Solution  Be sureto enter a user name and password for the remote operating system  You must have  administrative rights on the server or be a member of the Pervasive Admin group in order to create a  new database on the server  Granting Administrative Rights for the Database Engine explains how to set  up the Pervasive Admin group     For Windows 32 bit platforms  be sure that you are set up as a local user on the system  not a network  user  Network users have a domain name and a back slash preceding the user name  such as  BOSTON GILBERT  Besure that the user who is a member of the Administrators group or   Pervasive Admin group is a local user     If you have checked permissions and your user login does in fact meet one of the criteria above  then you  should also check to make surethat you are logged into the correct network  You can verify whether you  are logged into the correct network by attempting to read or writeto a server that you are certain uses  the target operating system     Unable to connect to the specified 
16.   Click the expand icon to the left  of an object to see objects under it  The expand icon may bea plus sign          a black right  pointing  triangle            or some other similar symbol  The collapse icon appears after you click an expand icon   Click the collapse icon to hide subordinate objects     If properties  configurable settings  apply to an object  you can access them by right clicking an object  and selecting Properties  You can also click an object then press Alt Enter to display properties  See also  Configuration Reference in Advanced O perations Guide     Figure19 Example Objects Shown in PSQL Explorer                Ta Pervasive PSQL  5   a   PSQL   A Local Client  of Services  a  E Engines  4 E vm win7 ent 32  anonymous   4  A Databases    DEFAULTDB  a   DEMODATA  4  3 Tables  Billing                Class       Course  Dept  Enrolls             Faculty       Person       Room  Student  Tuition   Ez Views   Ez Stored Procedures   Ez User Defined Functions   Ez Triggers   Ez Users   Ez Groups   Ez System Objects  B TEMPDB          HRS                   48    Right click Tasks    An Overview of PSQL Control Center    In addition to accessing properties  numerous other tasks can be invoked from PSQL Explorer by right   clicking an object  The following table summarizes the tasks     Table8 Right click Tasks for Objects in PSQL Explorer                                  Working with Task Right click For information  see  All Objects View or set object Any obje
17.   Indexes    page of Table Editor is active  If required  perform the steps for To work  with indexes     2 Click the desired index in the Indexes list   The Index Segment Details displays   3 Click the desired segment in the Columns cell then open thelist of columns  click          Index Editor  Indexes Index Segment Details  ES index_o1  Ounique O Partial  Normal     Y  Allow Modifications             Columns SortOrder   Delete        Delete   Student_ID Y Ascending   Student ID   Transaction_Number 3   Log 3   Amount_Owed   Amount_Paid         4 From theColumnslist  click the desired column designated as the index segment        Note Some data types  such as LON GVARBINARY  cannot be used for an index  Columns with such  data types are not valid choices        Thedefault sort order is Ascending  If you need a descending sort order  select Descending from the  Sort Order list for the Column you want changed     5 Continue selecting columns from thelist until you have completed all segment modifications     142    Table Editor Tasks    Note that a column can be selected for an index only once  Once selected  the column is removed  from thelist of choices because the column has already been designated in the index     6 Click File  gt  Saveor  El before changing pages within Table Editor      gt  To delete an index segment       Note Each index requires a minimum of one segment  To delete an index that has only onesegment   delete the index itself        1 Ensure that the    
18.   Transaction Tracking System  and TTS are trademarks of N ovell  Inc    Oracle  Java  all trademarks and logos that contain Oracle  or Java  are trademarks or registered trademarks  of Oracle Corporation    All other company and product names are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective  companies       Copyright 2014 Actian Corporation  All rights reserved  Reproduction  photocopying  or transmittal of  this publication  or portions of this publication  is prohibited without the express prior written consent of  the publisher    This product includes software developed by Powerdog Industries     Copyright 1994 Powerdog Industries   All rights reserved  This product includes software developed by KeyWorks Software     Copyright 2002  KeyWorks Software  All rights reserved  This product includes software developed by DUN DAS  SOFTWARE     Copyright 1997 2000 DU N DAS SOFTWARE LTD   all rights reserved  This product  includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation  http   www apache org      This product uses the free unixOD BC Driver M anager as written by Peter Harvey   pharvey codebydesign com   modified and extended by Nick Gorham  nick easysoft com   with local  modifications from Actian Corporation  Actian Corporation will donate their code changes to the current  maintainer of the unixODBC Driver M anager project  in accordance with the LGPL license agreement of  this project  The unixODBC Driver Danager home pageis located at www unixod
19.   file is inaccessible when everybody else can get to it  What   s wrong     Use PSQL System Analyzer to be sure that all components from previous versions of Btrieve or PSQL  have been archived  Then  make sure your configuration settings are correct  Find the file pvsw log and  check for error messages indicating a status code 8505 or 8517  These status codes indicate that attempts    233    Basic Troubleshooting    were made to use a local Workgroup engine to read the data files   N ote that hexadecimal values in  message strings written to pvsw log are preceded by    Ox    to distinguish them from decimal values      Start PCC  see Starting PCC on Windowsin PSQL User s Guide   Right click on Local Client then click  Properties  Click Access  Ensure that the option UseLocal MicroKernel Engine is not check marked and  that Use Remote MicroKernel Engineis check marked       have files sitting on the server that are shared and yet PSQL cannot read them  What s wrong     How arethefiles shared  PSQL doesnot support mappinga drive letter using Redirected mapping under  Microsoft  or using the hidden Admin share  C   under Windows 32 bit platforms     M ake sure that users have appropriate operating system login credentials to access the file server     Run PSQL System Analyzer and choose the Network Communications Test to be sure that you have  proper connectivity     l am using SQL queries to create a definition for an old table  The resulting record size is off   Why     Star
20.   right click on the database that you want to delete   Click Delete   Click Yes to confirm the deletion     If the setting Always removeassociated DSN entries is turned off  the Confirm DSN Removal dialog  appears     The following DSN entries reference the  DBNAME being removed  Select those entries     ed        I Always remove associated DSN entries     If you want to removea DSN associated with the database  ensure that the DSN is check marked in  the list     Note that multiple DSN s can be associated with one database  In such cases  you may remove the  DSN s that you want and retain the ones that you want     69    Using PSQL Control Center    5 Optionally  select the option Always remove associated DSN entries if you want PCC to set DSN    removal as the default action        y    Note If you select the Always remove associated DSN entries option  PCC no longer prompts you  for DSN removal when you delete a database  PCC will automatically remove all DSN s associated    with the database being deleted     If you decide later to turn off the option  in PCC click Window  expand the PSQL node if it is not    already expanded  then click General         gt  To repair a database name    Using the tables  data files  from one database for a newly created database with a different name can  result in the inability to open the tables for the new database  In certain situations  the tables can have  the original database name bound to them  For example  if the original databa
21.   you may also need to add proxy_userid and proxy_passwd     2 Authorize PSQL Vx Server using the command line interface License Administrator utility  See To  Authorize a Key     Considerations For No Internet Access    If the machine on which you are installing PSQL does not have Internet access or is not connected to a  machine with Internet access  you may authorize the product key using offline authorization     Offline authorization consists of three phases  In the first phase  an Authorization Request Data file     ath  is generated on the machine without internet connectivity  During the second phase  the file is  then uploaded to an authorization server from a machine with internet access  Upon completion of this  transmission  an Authorization Key Data file is downloaded in the form of a product key    pky  file  In  the final phase  the product key fileis authorized on the machine without Internet connectivity and  PSQL is authorized     The quickest and simplest method for authorizing PSQL is using online or remote authorization   Whenever possible  try to authorize your PSQL product using one of these methods  The PSQL  installation  for example  allows you to authorize online as part of the installation process     Key Status  or State    Thestatus of a product key is displayed in the License Administrator as the    state     Key states includethe   following      Active  key is authorized and available for use     m Inactive  key isno longer in use This state i
22.  12348 psql 104 18446744073709551612  psqlBDUsample 5 12349 psql 105 18446744073709551611    188    Command Line Interface Utility Reference    psqlBDUsample 6 12350 psql 106 18446744073709551610  psqlBDUsample 7 12351 psql 107 18446744073709551609  psqlBDUsample 8 12352 psql 108 18446744073709551608  psqlBDUsample 9 12353 psql 109 18446744073709551607  psqlBDUsamplel10 12354 psql 110 18446744073709551606    Note that in any data file being used as source input  no white space must exist between the column  delimiters and the data values  even if the data values are enclosed in quotes     Examples    The following examples assume that a table named BDU_Tableis part of the Demodata sample  database  To add such a table to Demodata  use the following query           CREATE TABLE BDU Table  Name CHAR 20  NOT NULL CASE  PhoneNo INTEGER  BuildingName  CHAR 25  NOT NULL CASE  RoomNo UINT NOT NULL HeadOfDept UBIGINT NOT NULL     To run BDU with the default options                                   bdu demodata BDU Table C  data_file txt    y    Note The input data must be TAB delimited to use default options  If the input data is not TAB  delimited  you must specify the delimiter with the  t parameter        For example  to usethe data from Examples  which is comma delimited  you would run BDU as  follows     bdu demodata BDU Table C  data_file txt  t         To run BDU for the    Billing    table in the sample database    DEM ODATA    and load TAB delimited data  from afilethat use
23.  214  PVOD PASS  indie wane Ae a Sed ee Pe ea an ee Oe Ss 215  DESCHIDUOM E a tcc ccna tee e cee ra Aes a See G08 TA hh canoe Maes Ry a yess 215  SYNOPSIS O NR 215  OPONE iio a ata iaa io ba 215  Examples datos a Soh a Oe Pe ae A A o E 215  O AR Atheros 216  Description  comia o work o anaele tod a Sat 216  SYNOPSIS a taiu id lidia tad 216  OPUS  ass Lat A A a cap a io Aten 216  SOO AISO ci  sees iia de Se Gunes anda E oi E ia ee cod eae 216    A NE 217  Descrip  a E a a a a la    ob as 217  SYNOPSIS  mica a A A a de 217  A NS ra td et 217  SOG AISO  f Scat a Saget Bae  aia sas 217  Examples ican sao aii kath we edi Ba od Wat a EE ls 218  RDG  dr ao REN a ed Se on Ed Sedan Pade ee aie 219  DiCSCHIPLIOMN   Sarit A A  219  SYNOPSIS  a aR Uae ae Ht i Carte Ou aha eek 219    ODUONS  a rara 2 a 2 A ot MRE Rh aE Bak eS eee aks 219    SAO o Lesa  Ped a Mae A eed kee al Pa eye als Goals 219  9 Basic Troubleshooting                                               4 221  How to Identify and Solve Common Problems  General Troubleshooting            0    oo    222  Error MessagesfroMPCC o    ooo 226  Frequently Asked Questions         o o o o o oo oooo ee 228  Installation  di ss os hoa ig a ach ga a 231  PC Gin tartan A O Soe wana a oad ap ee Sp ke 231  SECUN sits  autocad ap Barco pach Wy were eh nt a e ot uth ah anh Ma 232  User COUN  stich acho atid ed hohe  a tots the A od ae ite es hal ts Mee alts Acide bcp td 232  N CLWOPKING  sa were eee dda ate a Mest ce nee Bs 233  Difficulty Acc
24.  32   bit and 64 bit applications  Refer to the ODBC documentation on the UNIXODBC Web site for a  discussion of 64 bit ODBC  For example  you may find the following information useful  http     www unixodbc org doc ODBC64 html     See Also  btadmin  dbmaint    sql    205    Command Line Interface U tilities    isql    Description    isql is an interactive ODBC test utility that you can use to test your DSNs for their connectivity to  databases and to execute SQL statements once you are connected to a database  The 32 bit utility is  named isql and is installed with PSQL Server 32 bit  PSQL Client 32 bit  and PSQL 64 bit  The 64 bit  utility is named isql64 and is installed with PSQL Server 64 bit and with PSQL Client 64 bit     Theonly difference between the two utilities is thetype of DSN to which they can connect  By default   dsnadd creates DSN s that are accessible to both 32 bit and 64 bit applications  the DSN s specify the  driver description    Pervasive O DBC Interface      You can test connectivity of such DSNs with   sql or  isql64  See PSQL ODBC Driver Descriptions for Linux     Deprecated  legacy style D SN s are accessible only to 32 bit applications  Therefore  you can test  connectivity of such DSN s only with isql  See FAQs About ODBC and DSN Support for Linux     For example  to connect to the DEM ODATA sample database included with PSQL  run   sql  or isql64   with theDSN asthe first parameter  isql DEMODATA OF isq164 DEMODATA   TheDSN for DEM ODATA  speci
25.  Department  Enrolls  Macros  Faculty  Modules    Ea Favorites    Person  Room    8 8 8 8 808000000          Note If you are linking a table and it does not have an index that uniquely identifies each record   then Microsoft Access displays a list of the fields in the linked table  Click a field or a combination  of fields that will uniquely identify each record  and then click OK        40    DeletingDSNs       Deleting DSNs    The procedures in this section do not delete Data Dictionary Files  DDFs  or data files     By default  when you delete a database in the PSQL Control Center  the associated DSN entries are  removed simultaneously      gt  To toggle automatic removal of DSN entries when deleting a database in PCC    1  2  3    On the PCC Window menu  click Preferences  Expand the PSQL nodeif it is not already expanded   Click General   Clear the option Always remove associated DSN entries and click OK     When you delete a database in PCC  you will be prompted by the Confirm DSN Removal dialog  before deleting it     Fa Confirm DSN Removal    The following DSN entries reference the DBNAME being  removed  Select those entries you would like removed     DEMODATA         Always remove associated DSN entries        You can clear those DSNs that you do not want to delete     You can turn on automatic removal of DSN entries at anytime by selecting Always remove  associated DSN entries in       Confirm DSN Removal dialog    General screen of the Preferences dialog     To Del
26.  Failover environment  or     Can  install PSQL in a Clustering environment      Canl install PSQL in a Load Balancing environment      Canl install PSQL on a server running Btrieve v6 x or earlier        How do  I keep my Workgroup Engine from starting up automatically when   reboot     PCC      Howdol start PCC on Linux     Security    When dol login using an operating system user and password  and when do   login using a database  user and password     a Why dol get a    login failed    message when   have a Pervasive Admin group defined or   have  administrator rights     User Count  Session Count  Data In Use        Howdo  authorizeaUser Count Upgrade         How does a PSQL engine using the concurrent user license model keep track of how many people  are accessing the data  If people access the data with two engines at the same time  what happens         Does the Workgroup engine use concurrent or per seat licensing         am thinking of moving from a PSQL engine with concurrent user licensing to one with capacity   based licensing  How do   determine the appropriate size for my data use license     Networking    a How do   know which protocol   am using for communication   can see other systems in Network  Neighborhood but   can t get to my data     Difficulty Accessing Data        upgraded from Btrieve v6 x or earlier to PSQL v12  Now   get error messages telling me that a file  is inaccessible when everybody else can get to it  What   s wrong        havefiles sittin
27.  GUI    Although not strictly a CLI utility  it is  mentioned here for reference  See  Notification Viewer in Advanced  Operations Guide   psc Manipulates PSQL services No Yes Yes No No  psregedit Configures PSQL components by No No No Yes Yes  editing the PSQL registry  psregsvr Register PSQL components No No No Yes Yes                      181          Command Line Interface U tilities                   Utility Description GUI Available Windows Linux  Server   Client   Server   Client  pvdbpass Specifies user names and passwords   PSQL Control Center  see Yes Yes Yes Yes  for secure databases PSQL Security in Advanced  Operations Guide   pvddl Processes SQL statements in a PSQL Control Center  see   Yes Yes Yes Yes  command file SQL Editor   pvnetpass Specifies user names and passwords   No Yes Yes Yes Yes  for remote servers  rbldcli Rebuilds MicroKernel data files  Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes       182                         Command Line Interface Utility Reference       Command Line Interface Utility Reference    This section provides a reference for the following command line interface utilities        bcfg   a bdu       bmon     btadmin   a butil   m clilcadm  w64clilcadm  clilcadm64       Clipaadm  w64clipaadm  clipaadm64   a dbmaint     dsnadd  isql64   a  licgetauth  w64licgetauth  licgetauth64     psc      psregsvr      pvdbpass       pvddl   a  pvnetpass   m  rbldcli    183    Command Line Interface U tilities    bcfg  The   c  g utility is documented in Advanced O perat
28.  Interactions Between  Btrieve and Relational  Constraints   back to Figure 20   Long The database engine supports two versions of metadata  referred to as version 1   SQL Grammar Support in  Metadata  V2    V1  and version 2  V2    V2 metadata is also referred to as    long metadata      ODBC Guide  metadata    Metadata version is a property of the database and applies to all tables within that   System Tables in SQL  database  A database cannot use some tables with V1 metadata and others with   Engine Reference  V2 metadata  The DDFs of different metadata versions cannot interact    back to Figure 20   Database Specifies the code page property for the database  The default is    server default       Database Code Page  Code Page meaning the default operating system code page on the server     See    Related Material    column for the section where this property is discussed  fully      back to Figure 20        Create 32 bit  Engine DSN          For ODBC access  you must set up a data source name  DSN  to refer to the  database name  By default  the name of the new DSN is the same as the  Database Name  Multiple DSNs may point to the same named database     The default is to create the DSN with an encoding translation option of    None        Note  The DSN that you are creating is a 32 bit Engine DSN  PCC cannot create  64 bit DSNs     Use an ODBC Interface utility to create 64 bit DSNs  such as ODBC  Administrator on Windows   Note that DSN names must be unique for their  b
29.  Mak as  ieee eee Tae ee Reto ee a we ad 174  View Modules TASKS cio aR eee ERR ee A NE a a ee 174  Test Activelnstallation Tasks    es 175  LOG Files TASKS ia o waht ed ob eves the fo re Aiea SR Marts ha A Lk SAS 177  8 Command Line Interface Utilities                      lt  lt           179  UsingPSQL Command Line Interface Utilities  CLI Utilities Overview    aoaaa 180  Platformsthat Include CLI Utilities    a 180  Whereto Find CLUtHitieS ici a e es eee G e a ee 180  Utilities by Platform and EngineType     1    es 180  Command Line Interface Utility Reference    aaau a 183  DCI   E te eh teehee hs Neg We EAN tial did A ORO 184  Dit RY A A ih P a antes a a A a NA 185  Descriptio Mags eraa ar E aa ee E i Sit Rada Ge ON E E UE S ea GE Bee EOG 185  SYNOPSIS  sho a aa tona aona Maan dave bat DAA a an h h a An a a d tee aed 185  Parameters mi feo So as nde ce it a eria di tl da o cd hed 186  NOS are Ae E AN A A e R gE ae oe ood a TA 187  EXaMPIES ei a ozara E IS SAA E AS A EOE ae  aks 189  DOIE aese ata Dr vt tes Maen E a Seagal hah om date a OT he 191  ptadmin at to in aa A see a Ashe ened  Uh Med A eS 192  DeSChiptions vai civank reine kok Pa en eae an r a a A PA ae a ae 192  SYNOPSIS pi GR ea eel Ei eee ee Ok Ad eee Gee ee ws 192  OPUS  iae 098 2 ut Rs sis la ade ea Bit Bake 192  SOG ASO a atch dt o PK a MRL    ft eA Bas Ak Akt 192  NOE eerie  get a ds ASA a E ae Oo a ha a ey 192  DU sr Soares aes  EIA tenets eae was orp eh Mare 194  DESCHIDUOM s reii i ance dig eaaa a te 
30.  PSA    The following are the sections found in this chapter       PSA Concepts    PSA GUI Visual Reference  a PSA Tasks    169    PSQL System Analyzer  PSA        PSA Concepts    PSQL System Analyzer  PSA  is a utility that allows you to perform the following actions       View the PSQL components on your system with version information  usage status  size  and  location     m Identify duplicate components on your system      Test your network communications to verify connectivity   m Test connectivity to the M icroKernel Engine    m Test connectivity to the Relational Engine     View Modules    This option allows you to view all PSQL components and any other files you specify  You can add  additional components to the search list  Their versions  usage status  file size  and location is displayed   Duplicate files are identified so you can resolve any potential conflicts     View modules scans a machine for PSQL components to determine which ones areloaded into memory     Test Active Installation    This option allows tests of the network connectivity between aPSQL client and the M icroKernel Engine  and Relational Engine  If errorsare detected  PSA gives you detailed troubleshootinginformation to help  you resolve the problem    Network    TheNetwork Communication tests verify that your client or workstation can communicate with  network protocols to reach the machine on which the PSQL database engine is installed  For the TCP   IP protocols  both  Pv4 and  Pv6 numeric and
31.  Parameters continued    Parameter Mandatory  Default Value Description  Optional         lt c C gt  encoding Optional The system code page or   The valid values for encoding are      ASCII    ifthe system code    ASCII   page cannot be  determined UTF 6  UTF 16LE    UTF 16BE    The encoding parameter is not case sensitive and does  not require quotes  See Examples     Note  Ifa data file contains a byte order mark  BOM    BDU uses the encoding specified by the BOM  That is  if  a data file uses a BOM to indicate an encoding of UTF 8   UTF 16LE  or UTF 16BE  BDU uses that encoding  regardless of what value you specify for the encoding  parameter on the command line     If you provide an invalid value for encoding  the message  returned is    Invalid value for command line argument     file_encoding             lt h H gt  Optional Displays the version of BDU and the usage help                   Notes    Configuration Settings  You are not required to change any PSQL configuration settings to use BDU     BDU loads data into a table using the accelerated mode  During the load of data  the M icroKernel does  not perform transaction logging     If you use archival logging  back up your data files again     Error Logging    By default  BDU logsall information and error messages to the standard error stream  stderr   You may  specify a log file to which the utility writes the information or error messages     Two types of errors are not logged  critical and recoverable  With critica
32.  Pervasive ODBC Interface    driver  for 32 bit or 64 bit applications            Command Line Interface Utility Reference    Table19 FAQsAbout ODBC and DSN Support for Linux continued       Question    Answer       Can   still create deprecated  legacy   style Engine DSNs and Client DSNs     Yes  but you must specify the  engdsn or  clntdsn option with dsnadd  DSNs  created with either option support only 32 bit applications        If   am using ODBC Administrator on a  Windows client  why do   not see my  DSNs     On 64 bit Windows operating systems  64 bit system DSNs are distinct from 32 bit  system DSNs because of the registry design  If you are using the 64 bit ODBC  Administrator  you will not see the 32 bit system DSNs  and vice versa        What if my application uses DTI to  manage DSNs     The DTI functions for DSNs manage only 32 bit Engine DSNs  Therefore  the DTI  functions for DSNs are deprecated along with the 32 bit Engine Interface ODBC  driver     An alternative to using DTI to manage DSNs is to use SQL and ODBC statements   For example  you could use CREATE DATABASE to create a named database and  SQLConfigDatasource to configure the DSNs        Going forward  is there a recommended  strategy for ODBC connections           Yes  New applications or revised 32 bit applications  local or remote  should  connect to a named database           ODBC Header Files    Thesql h  saltypes h  and sqlext h header files for ODBC contain differences for the compilation of
33.  Windows Server     2 Substitute    PSQL Workgroup Engine    as the service name if you use Windows Services control  panel  Substitute    psqlWGE    as the service name if you use net start or psc     18    Starting and Stopping the Database Engine    Starting and Stopping the Database Engine on Linux    In Linux  the database engine runs asa daemon  The daemon isloaded as part of the installation process  and is set to be always available if you followed the complete installation     You must be logged in as the root user to start and stop the PSQL v12 daemon process  Use the shell  script psqi to start and stop the process    gt  To start the database engine on Linux  Enter the following at the command line    etc init d psql start  For PSQL 64 bit Server  this command starts both thetransactional daemon and the relational daemon   Therelational daemon is 32 bit only    gt  To stop the database engine on Linux  Enter the following at the command line    etc init d psql stop  For PSQL 64 bit Server  this command stops both the transactional daemon and therelational daemon      gt  To force stop the database engine on Linux    If the database engine does not start or stop correctly using the psql start and stop commands  you may  need to force stop the engine  The force stop removes any shared memory and semaphores created by  PSQL and stops the PSQL relational and transactional processes  Enter the following at the command  line to force stop the database engine      etc in
34.  You can export a schema for a particular table  or tables  or  at the database level  for all tables at once      gt  To export a table schema for a particular table  1 InPSQL Explorer  expand the Tables node for the desired database    If you are interested in system tables  expand the Tables node under System O bjects   2 Click thetablename for which you want to export its schema     If you want to export the schema for additional tables  press and hold Shift or Ctrl then click the  desired table names   In other words  use multiple select for the tables you want      Right click on the selected table name  then click Export Table Schema   4 Typethename and location if you want  for the exported file    The default file extension is    sql      5 Optionally  select the IN DICTIONARY or the USING option   6 Click OK     78    M etadata     gt  To export all table schemas at once    1  2  3  4    al    In PSQL Explorer  expand the Databases node    Right click the database name for which you want to export all of the table schemas   Click Export Table Schema    Type the name  and location if you want  for the exported file    The default file extension is    sql       Optionally  select the IN DICTIONARY or the USING option    Click OK     79    Using PSQL Control Center       Triggers  Stored Procedures  User defined Functions  and Views    PCC provides a way to create  modify  and deletetriggers  stored procedures  user defined functions  and  views  See also SQL Editor Ta
35.  a database might consist of the     Food Preferences    table below  and the    Phone Book    table above  With PSQL  a database consists of  one or more data files and Data Dictionary Files  DDFs  on your hard disk  The DDFs are special data  files that contain all the definitions for tables  columns  and other attributes that define the structure of  your database     Schema    Theterm schema refers to the complete set of definitions that describe the entire structure of a database   A typical schema includes definitions for tables  columns  indexes  and many other attributes  The DDFs  for a database contain the database s schema     Table3 Example Table for Food Preferences       Food Preferences    Table             Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Column 4  Col Names Name Meat Grain Drink  Row 1 Fred Black sushi wheat sake  Row 2 Jane Doe steak oats beer  Row 3 Ann Dean cod bran spring water    Remote    Theterm remote refers to an object  such as afile server or a database  that isnot located in the computer  you are using now  When you connect to a database over the network  you are connecting to aremote  database  Remote is the opposite of local  Remote can refer to either the client or the server  depending  on whether you are currently seated at the server computer or a client computer  Remote always refers  to an object that is not located on the system you are using     Local    Theterm local refersto the computer you are using right now  or something stored on this c
36.  a statement separator at the end of each statement  SQL Editor accepts  only the pound sign     and the semicolon     as statement separators  See To select an SQL statement  separator     If you arenot using temporary tables  you may use either separator solely or mix their usage within a set  of SQL statements  That is  some statements can end with a pound sign and others with a semicolon if  you so choose     150    SQL Editor Concepts    Temporary tables begin with         or          If you use temporary tables  the pound sign may not be used  as a statement separator  Instead  set the statement separator to the semicolon     Restrictions   The following actions and SQL statements are not supported in SQL Editor   m Creating a database   a Useof dynamic parameters  indicated by a question mark    a COMMIT and START TRANSACTION         n PCC SQL Editor in v12  you cannot edit views  stored procedures  user defined functions  or  triggersthat contain characters outsideof the database code page  You must first drop them and then  reenter them from an edited source file     Displaying Statement Results   SQL Editor displays the results of running SQL statements in the following PCC window views     Grid       Text    In addition  by default  an Outline window view displays a list of the SQL statements in SQL Editor   typically with a shorter line length  For example  you may want the Outline view to show only the first  5 words of each SQL statement in SQL Editor  To set pr
37.  ability of your client to connect to the PSQL database engine through the Relational  Engine  When you run this test  PSA attempts to perform common SQL database operations  A dialog  box displays during the tests to show progress     If your machine passes this test  then the following is verified      TheRelational Engine relational engine is running   a Your client interface components are installed correctly   a Thenetwork communication between the client and the database engine is functioning correctly    SQL applications running on your computer should function correctly     Frequently Asked Questions   Listed below are some frequently asked questions about PSA    a Whatisthe default log file name      Can  usea different log file name    a Whatisthelocal default location for the log file      Whatistheremote default location for the log file    a What kind of information is contained in the log file    a What happens to theinformation in the log file each time the utility is run       Howdol run PSA      When would   want to use PSA     What is the default log file name   The default file name for the log file is PSA log     Can   use a different log file name     You can rename thefile  but the name applies only for that session of PSA  PSA defaults the name to  PSA log the next time you execute PSA     171    PSQL System Analyzer  PSA     What is the local default location for the log file   The default local location for the log file is under the application data d
38.  applies because the database engine uses the file  name for various areas of functionality while ignoring the file name extension  Since only the file    name is used to differentiate files  files that differ only in their file name extension look identical to  the database engine     Specify the additional options on the dialog as required for the database  See Table 10 for a  discussion of the options     Creating  M odifying  Deleting  and Repairing PSQL Databases     gt  To modify properties of a database    1    3    In PCC PSQL Explorer  right click the database engine for which you want to modify the properties   then click Properties                    B Pervasive  SQL  fc Local Client  E cA Engines  E 2 tment  A A Databases  ER MyDataBase  Master                 Delete Delete    Refresh FS    Properties       On the Properties dialog  click the tree nodefor which you want to specify properties       Directories       General     Relational Constraints  e Security    Set the specific properties as required      gt  To delete a database    You cannot delete the database to which you are currently logged in  See To log out from a database  engine in PSQL User s Guide     If database security is set to    mixed    or    database     you must first remove the security  You cannot delete  a database if security on it is set to    mixed    or    database     See To turn off security using PSQL Explorer  and To turn off security using SQL     1  2  3    In PCC PSQL Explorer
39.  authorize   a gt   lt key   Authorizes the specified key or authorization key data file  offline authorization    authorization_filename pky gt          lt deauthorize   d gt  key Deauthorizes the specified key from the computer on which the CLI utility is running  If the  specified key is a permanent key  also deauthorizes all increase keys  user count  session  count  data in use  associated with the permanent key                 108    License Administrator Command Line Interface    Table 13 License Administrator Command Line O ptions and Parameters continued       Options and Parameters    Function         lt clear   c gt   key   force       lt generate   g gt  key  output_filename      lt number   n gt   key     Clears from the machine all permanent keys and their associated increase keys for user count   session count  or data in use     If a key is specified  only the specific key and its associated increases for user count  session  count  or data in use are cleared  If no key is specified  all keys and associated increases are  cleared     Note  This command is useful if you are unable to deauthorize a key because of changes in the  hardware configuration and you need to authorize another set of keys  You could clear the  key s  and authorize the product with a different key than the one s  you cleared     If the force option is included  a confirmation message is not displayed     Note  This option only removes a key from the local PSQL server  It does not deauthor
40.  because they are available to all users on a given computer        In theDrivers window  select PervasiveO DBC Client Interfacefor a 32 bit DSN or PervasiveO DBC  Interface for a 64 bit DSN     31    Using PSQL    4 Specify a Data SourceName DSN  for which you want to set up a connection  ThisDSN helps you  identify the data source     Figure5 PervasiveO DBC Interface for Client DSN s       Data Source Name   Description  Pervasive ODBC Client Interface   Cancel      Connection Attributes                   Server Name IP  f Help    Transport Hint  Try TCPIP first  then SPX  gt     Advanced     Data Options  Database Name  Create     Get List  Engine DSN    Create       Modify        GetList         Note that on the 64 bit interface  the Engines DSN option is not available and is not present on the  GUI     5 For Server Name IP  specify a machine name or TCP IP address of a machine running the PSQL  database engine     6 Select the Transport H int desired     7 Specify aD atabase Nameto which to connect  Click Get List to obtain alist of the existing databases  on the server listed for Server Name IP     For 32 bit DSN sonly  you may specify an Engine DSN instead of a databasename   Notethat Engine  DSNs are deprecated  so it is preferable to specify a database name rather than an Engine DSN    Click Get List to obtain a list of the existing DSN s on the server listed for Server Name IP  Click  Modify to modify an existing DSN  or Create to create a new DSN     8 Ifyou want a
41.  bit version is named w64clilcadm  and the Linux  64 bit version is named clilcadm64         gt  To Display Information About a Key  14 To display information about all keys  enter the following command   clilcadm  i  2 To display information about a specific key  enter the following command   clilcadm  i key  See License Administrator Command Line Options and Parameters for the columnar information  returned by the  i option    gt  To Perform a Validation  1 To perform a validation  enter the following command   clilcadm  t    we       Tip To determine the product key s post validation state and date  use the  i option to display  information about the specified key         gt  To Display Remaining Authorizations   4 To display the remaining authorizations for all product keys  enter the following command   clilcadm  n   2 To display the remaining authorizations for a specific key  enter the following command   clilcadm  n key    Ya  f       Tip To determine a product key  usethe  i option to display information about all keys  See To  Display Information About a Key         gt  To Authorize a Key  1 Enter the following command   clilcadm  a key    116     gt     1    Y    SS     gt     License Administration T asks       Tip When you authorize an increase key for user count  session count  or data in use  a permanent  product key must already exist  The vendor ID of the increase key must match the vendor ID of the  permanent key     To Deauthorize a Key  Enter the following
42.  characters        EUC_JP Extended Unix Code  EUC _JP is a variable width encoding used to represent the elements of  three Japanese character set standards  JIS X 0208  JIS X 0212  and JIS X 0201        Shift_JIS Shift_JIS  Japanese Industrial Standards  is a character encoding for the Japanese language        UTF 8 UTF  Universal Character Set Transformation Format  8 is an 8 bit variable width encoding that  can represent every character in the Unicode character set  lt was designed for backward  compatibility with ASCII and to avoid the complications of endianness and byte order marks   BOM         UTF 8 with BOM Same as UTF 8 except with a byte order mark  BOM    which is a Unicode character used to  signal the endianness  byte order    written to the file during the save action     UTF 16BE  big endian  A UTF encoding in 16 bit with byte order of big endian        UTF 16BE with BOM Same as UTF 16BE except with a BOM written to the file during the save action                 UTF 16LE  little endian    A UTF encoding in 16 bit with byte order of little endian     90    Dialogs for File O pen and File Save    Table12 Encoding Choices for File Open and File Save Dialogs    Encoding Discussion  UTF 16LE with BOM Same as UTF 16LE except with a BOM written to the file during the save action     Notes        By default  PCC remembers the encoding of a file that has been opened  If you modify the file and save your changes  the  changes are saved in the original encoding  Howeve
43.  click Remove     To move the tool toward the top of thelist  click Up     To move the tool toward the bottom of the list  click Down    55    Using PSQL Control Center       Services on Windows Servers    PCC offers a convenient way to work with PSQL servers on Windows machines without having to use  the Windows Services control panel  You can start  stop  and set the startup policy from within PCC     You must stop the relational and transactional services to completely stop PSQL  Stopping just one of  the services does not stop the database engine completely     This section applies only to Windows platforms  not to Linux        Note PSQL products other than the database engine also run as services  The services of these other  products can havea dependency on the database engine services  See Services Dependencies for  further information         gt  To start or stop services   1 In PSQL Explorer  expand the Services node in the tree   2 Right click on the servicethat you want to stop or start   3 Perform one of the following actions       Click Start Service to start the service    Click Stop Service to stop the service    Click Restart Service to stop then start the service     Va       i Tip You can also stop or restart all services with a single command  Right click the Services nodein  the tree  then click Stop All Services or Restart All Services         gt  To set services startup policy   1 In PSQL Explorer  expand the Services node in the tree    2 Right click on
44.  command   clilcadm  d key       Tip When you deauthorize a product key  all increase keys for user count  session count  or data in  use associated with that product key are automatically deauthorized as well        To Remove Keys Without Deauthorizing    Circumstances can occur for which you need to remove a key and its associated increase keys for user  count  session count  or data in use without deauthorizing the product  This action is called    clearing     a key     1    To clear a specific key  enter the following command  where key is the individual key you want to  Clear     clilcadm  c key  To clear all keys  enter the following command   clilcadm  c    With either command  you can include the    force    parameter if you want to suppress the clear  confirmation message     Example  clilcadm  c force     gt     1    To Repair a Key   Enter the following command    clilcadm  e key   The command window displays a message asking you to confirm that this is a genuine copy of the  software product  Enter    A    to confirm  After the repair is complete  the command window displays  a message confirming the repair    To Display Help   Enter either of the following commands    clilcadm   lt help   h gt    clilcadm      117    License Administration    Alternative Authorization Tasks    PSQL provides some alternate ways to authorize and deauthorize your PSQL product  If possible   however  authorize PSQL using online authorization  If the machine where PSQL is installed h
45.  exists to execute all statements sequentially in the SQL Editor  The command is called  Execute All SQL Statements and can be invoked from the SQL menu  from a toolbar button  or from  within the Outline view  Results from this command always display in the Text view regardless of the  statements in SQL Editor     152    SQL Editor Concepts    Identifying the Text Window    The Text window view showsin atext format the result of running SQL statements  You cannot change  the data values in the database by changing the text  but you can copy the text     You may use the Text window view for SELECT statements to show data returned  The data returned  appears in acolumnar format with each field represented as an underlined heading  The data appears as  rows below the headings     For how to change the font used by the Text window  see To set preferences for Text Output  click Text  Output     For PCC running on an operating system set to an English language locale  the system selects a default  font  For non English locales  PCC seeks to match the    default font    or    system font    if such can be  found  Otherwiseit will select reasonable font     Figure24 Text Window View      PaPervasive SOL      O   E Room as  sit Sems   E    BE 0utine   3    g         Pervasive  SAL SELECT   FROM  Room  Ales  S     Local Client     E Microkemel Router                Room  4 SELECT  FROM  Room               E o Databases  E  CHECKID  H  DBASES  e   DEFAULTDE    E  DEMODATA        Classr
46.  for To work    with indexes     2 Click the desired index in the Indexes list     The Index Segment Details displays     Modify the segment details as desired     4 Click File  gt  Save or  El before changing pages within Table Editor     140    Table Editor Tasks     gt  To delete an index    Thedatabase engine creates some indexes  such asI DENTITY column indexes and primary key indexes   These indexes are read only and cannot be deleted     1    4  5    Ensure that the    Indexes    page of Table Editor is active  If required  perform the steps for To work  with indexes     Click the desired index in the Indexes list   With the Index you want to delete selected  click Delete in the Indexes list     Index Editor      Indexes      E Student_Trans Add       E myindex       Click Yes to confirm the deletion   Click File  gt  Save or  E  before changing pages within Table Editor      gt  To insert an index segment    For detailed information about segments  see Segmentation in the PSQL Programmer s Guide  which is  part of the PSQL Software Developer s Kit  SDK      Only the database engine can add an index to an IDENTITY or aSMALLIDENTITY column  However   you can includean IDENTITY or aSMALLIDENTITY column as part of amultiple segment index  See  also AUTOINC in SQL Engine Reference     1    2    3    4    Ensure that the    Indexes    page of Table Editor is active  If required  perform the steps for To work  with indexes     Click the desired index in the Indexes list   Th
47.  for each uniqueincoming protocol from the same client computer session  If one  application uses TCP IP and another application uses SPX IPX  two users are counted if both  applications run on thesame machine  If different address formats of the same protocol are used  only  one user is counted  For example  if one application uses  Pv4 and another uses   Pv6  only one user is  counted if both applications run on the same machine    Pv4 and I Pv6 arejust different address formats  of TCP IP     Obtaining a User Count    An initial user count is provided as part of the product key  A product key is issued by Actian  Corporation or by your application vendor if the PSQL database engine is enbedded in an application     You may also increase the user count beyond the initial amount provided by the product key  See  Increasing User Count     Capacity based License Model    The capacity model shifts the emphasis from how many users to how much work the database server  performs  The model is based on the process capacity of the engine determined by the amount of data  in use  Thisis the total size of data files authorized to be opened concurrently     98    License Administration Concepts    Data In Use       Datain use    is defined as the total size of all concurrently open data files   A data fileis a file created by  an application to provide the data processed by that application      Data in use limit    is the maximum  permitted amount of all concurrently open data files a
48.  gt     UIDuname  PWDpword   DBdbname     VRI                           Note On Linux distributions  all         parameters use the hyphen           instead of the slash  For  example  the  O parameter for butil  copy is O  asin butil  copy  O        194    Command Line Interface Utility Reference    Options  Maintenance Utility command options are not case sensitive unless the option is a filename     If you run but 11 without specifying a command option or with an invalid command option  a usage  message is printed  The usage message indicates that thereis an optional  s command line argument to  but il  This argument is ignored under Linux     For a complete discussion of the utility commands  options  and examples  see the section Btrieve  Command Line M aintenance Utility  butil  in Advanced O perations Guide     See Also  syslogd in Linux man pages  Btrieve API Guide  which describes the API for the M icroKernel Engine     195    Command Line Interface U tilities    clilcadm    Description    Thecommand line License Administrator utility manages the user count licenses on your engine  The  Windows and Linux 32 bit command line utility is named clilcadm  the Windows the 64 bit utility is  named w64clilcadm  and the Linux 64 bit version of this utility is named clilcadm64        Note On Linux  this utility can only berun by user accounts belonging to group pvsw  See Getting  Started With PSQL for information on PSQL Linux utilities and user accounts     Synopsis   clilcad
49.  gt  Save or  El before changing pages within Table Editor      gt  To set a column collating sequence    For additional information about collating sequences  see M anipulating Btrieve Data Files with  Maintenance in Advanced O perations Guide and Alternate Collating Sequences in the PSQL  Programmer s Guide  which is part of the PSQL Software Developer s Kit  SDK      If you usean alternate collating sequence  ACS   you cannot specify case sensitivity  Case sensitivity does  not apply if the key uses an ACS     1    5    Ensure that the    Columns    page of Table Editor is active  If required  perform the steps for To work  with columns     Click in the Collate cell for the desired column     You can set an alternating collating sequence  ACS  only for applicable data types  If collating  sequence is not applicable  the grid cell is shaded and you will be unableto edit the Collate cell     Delete the existing value  if present   Type the path and ACS filename you want     PSQL supplies an ACS file  upper alt  in the Samples folder   See Where arethe PSQL files installed   in Getting Started With PSQL   To use this file  you would type  file path PSQL samples upper alt     Upper alt treats upper and lower case letters the same for sorting  For example  if a database has  values abc  ABC  DEF  and Def  inserted in that order  thesorting with upper alt returns as abc  ABC   DEF  and Def   The values abc and ABC  and the values DEF and Def are considered duplicates and  are re
50.  hae ante Dnt th Mtoe rd Wath  hae  Dice 194  SYMOPSIS oa Sats hth E AA op id 194  OPtlONS vns a ban eed ile dee poe ee 195  SOG ASO isons BS aro de Rk Ge We ened gee aE ee ee ea Ghee ee A 195  AICA ce oss eevee Scarce a oy tore a dich  Bed Dh cope th os je eh a ot aw ad A 196  DESChIPUOMN  ffi   do sack ti Se hd Ae ae Si ik blob od hie be tk od 196  SYNOPSIS  gt  if tai es ee ti a i lee e ee be ee ea Oe 196  OPIO SSL RR A Soe BER RA SE ee ew eS 196  Se AlS ica it Hale aaa a ad ole ne Bae Aas ors Me 196  clipadd Are deine he an  Males dote dial le toi e i lle had cdl the Mind 197  Descriptions  aia A aloe alee Berio PAAR eae eh ede eS 197  SYNOPSIS esi SBA a eer ward Ba a ae Eater wee ke ee wea eS 197  OPUONS es tna la Boke OR aut  nto we Shoe Mas aR tak  Beh ee da RA 197  Se  ASO a  4 4 nlite tate bbe a do e ew AE ENE i f 197  CDIMAING iirsp A Oo eg 198  Description anena a aces Gear A RE S E E kD Sean ears E Daehn 198  SYNOPSIS  At ie a ES NN 198    vii    Contents    viii    OPULONS sf ies aia dd tad Se  Sede mayen aie ae  ot Se 198  SOG ASO ri e la Louise  dogs Al Gap te ie Lge toh 200  CSN AUC ita wg itn alte rienda Netti ued  Dai Wa tether dra Ge tes 201  Descriptions ss ceafa A is aed ean as Pak Oh Sa dae ane ie 201  ST A E en ab ain ce eens hh ae pee 201  OPON Saa a nce  ere te PAS  sae Tae tote A A ae ance  teat ane tee ee aa wives 202  EXOMDICS Ss paid ita ta aa iets E Bt Th ay coated edge ch Peed a 203  NOTES tice hewn Kiki  Coe ae Re id ea A cae Ate  Sa E o essai 
51.  icroKernel Engine and connects to a Linux database engine that is  configured to use BTPASSWD or PAM authentication  the application requires a set of credentials to  connect to the database engine   See Authentication in Getting Started With PSQL   Use pvnetpass to  configuretheset s  of credentials that the application will use  Pvnetpass must be run on every machine  that connects to the database engine  whether the database engine is local or remote     If you have a global and a user entry for the same server  the user s entry overrides the global  The user  nameshould includethefull user context  For example  in a Windows environment with domain names   specify the user as DoMAIN user  For a Linux environment  usethe user account name and the full  machine DNS name  For example  mymachine  mydomain     The pvnetpass utility can also be used by Windows clients to change their stored credentials that were  saved when using the security login dialog  See also Allow Client stored Credentials and Prompt for  Client Credentials  both in Advanced O perations Guide     Synopsis    pvnetpass   g    a    r    m  server   u user    p pwd   pvnetpass  d    Options   a Adds a server entry for a user specified by the  u parameter  If no user is specified  current user is assumed    d Displays the list of configured servers  The configured servers will display in two groups that are separated by  a dashed line  The ones above the line are global entries and are only viewable by admin
52.  in each record      75    UsingPSQL Control Center    76    Encoding of the exported data  For example  if you select   SO  8859 1  the data is exported using that  code page  The encoding choices are obtained from the machine on which the utility is running     Whether or not to write the names of the columns as the first line of the exported data   To export data from a database table   For a particular database  right click a table name under the Tables node    If you are interested in system tables  expand the Tables node under System O bjects   Click Export Data    Provide the export characteristics as discussed above then  click Finish     M etadata       Metadata    M etadata is data about data  The metadata for a PSQL database is called a schema  For a relational  database  the schema defines the tables  the fields in each table  and the relationships between fields and  tables  Schemas are stored as data dictionary files  DDFs  by PSQL     You can export the schema for one or more tables to a text file  The exported schema contains the  CREATE TABLE SQL statement  and CREATE INDEX statement if applicable  to create the table and  its indexes  The exported file has a default file extension of    sql    and is called an SQL script     TheSQL script file can be run  executed  in SQL Editor  See To open an SQL script     TheSQL script contains the text    Unable to open table    if a table cannot be opened  For example  the  error occurs if an owner name is set on a tab
53.  index in the Indexes list   The Index Segment Details displays   3 Click in the Sort Columns cell then open the list of sort choices  click        4 From the Sort Order list  click Ascending or Descending   The default sort order when an index segment is created is ascending   5 Click File  gt  Save or  El before changing pages within Table Editor      gt  To allow duplicates in an index    For detailed information about duplicates  see Duplicatability in the PSQL Programmer s Guide  which  is part of the PSQL Software Developer s Kit  SDK      1 Ensurethat the    Indexes    page of Table Editor is active  If required  perform the steps for To work  with indexes     2 Click the desired index in the Indexes list   The Index Segment Details displays     3 Clear the Unique option in the Index Segment Details area by selecting one of the other options   Partial or Normal         Note By default  indexes are created as Normal  allowing duplicates        4 Click File  gt  Save or  E  before changing pages within Table Editor      gt  To specify index as modifiable    For detailed information about modifiability  see M odifiability in the PSQL Programmer s Guide  which  is part of the PSQL Software Developer   s Kit  SDK      1 Ensure that the    Indexes    page of Table Editor is active  If required  perform the steps for To work  with indexes     2 Click the desired index in the Indexes list   The Index Segment Details displays   3 Click Allow Modifications option     Index Segme
54.  it to allow license authorization  Configure the  proxy server before you install PSQL  or omit product authorization during installation and authorize  the product after configuring the proxy server     Windows    Actian Corporation recommends that you configure proxy servers through Windows Internet Explorer  for the best results  PSQL license authorization works seamlessly with no modifications needed when  proxy servers are configured through Window Internet Explorer    If you are currently using a proxy server that was not configured using Windows Internet Explorer  we  recommend that you reconfigure it through Windows Internet Explorer  H owever  if using Windows  Internet Explorer to configure your proxy server is not an option  use the following steps     If you are using a 64 bit Windows operating system  there are two possible places where the Registry  settings for proxy servers can be stored      HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE Software Pervasive Software ELS  key     HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE Software Wow6432N ode Pervasive Software ELS  key   Dependingon thePSQL edition  Server  Client  Vx Server  or Workgroup   the ELS proxy server settings  can be created in either location  Licensing manager looks for its proxy server settings first in    HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE Software Wow6432N ode Pervasive Software ELS  key  If it cannot locate  them there  it looks in HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE Software Pervasive Software ELS  key     Therefore  if you are editing Registry settings for proxy servers  y
55.  m Thevalue for data in use decreases when a data file is closed by the final user to have the file open   Since more than one user can access the same data file  all opens must be closed before data in use  decreases       Messages pertaining to datain useare logged to the various PSQL logging repositories  For example   a message first alerts you when data in use reaches 90  of the data in use limit     Corrective Action When Data Use Limit ls Reached    The following suggested corrective actions actions may be taken when the data use limit is reached in  order to continue working with the engine     m Authorize an increase key for data in use  An increase key can be authorized at any time and does  not require that you close data files or stop the database engine  The increase is immediately  available  See Increasing Data In Use Limit      You may try closing some of the currently open data files  However  this action requires that you  know which data files are safe to close without resulting in incorrect data  incomplete records or  aborted transactions    Obtaining an Initial Data In Use Limit    Initial data in use limits are provided in the product key  The key is issued by Actian Corporation or by  your application vendor if the PSQL database engine is embedded in an application     You may also increase the data in use beyond the initial amount provided by the product key  See  Increasing Data In Use Limit     License Enforcement    Licensing for PSQL is enforced b
56.  modules      Test active installation  I Test network communication    Test transactional engine    Test relational engine   Log File     ee      J Append to the log file          GUI Object Description Related Information       View loaded PSQL   Displays all current PSQL components and version information in   View Modules Tasks       modules a table  Also allows you to add additional components to the   matrix   Test active Test the PSQL installation in three ways  network connectivity  Test Active Installation Tasks  installation functionality of the MicroKernel Engine  and functionality of the    Relational Engine  Select the options that correspond to the tests  you wish to perform        Test network Test the network connectivity to a machine running the database   To test your network  engine  The network tests display detailed information about any  problems encountered during the test and provide suggestions on  how to remedy the problems     If you do not have Internet Explorer installed  this test is not  available because the test uses an embedded HTML component  to display results              Test transactional Tests the functionality of the MicroKernel Engine  To test the MicroKernel   engine  transactional  Engine   Test relational Tests the functionality of the Relational Engine  To test the Relational Engine  engine   Log file Allows you to specify a different log file location than the default  To specify a different location for    PSA logs detailed info
57.  named addresses are supported  See also Drive based  Formats in Getting Started With PSQL for additional details about   Pv6     Using Advanced Settings  you can select the protocols to test as well asthenumber of stress test messages  to send  By default  the network test connects using any available protocol that is installed on the system  and configured for use in PSQL  See Supported Protocols configuration parameter found in Advanced  Operations Guide     The progress bar will complete for all selected tests  The steps involved in testing network  communication are     1 Verify Available Protocols   Verify Network Client Availability   Qualify Target Name   Resolve Target Location to network address  Verify Server Address   Verify Server Connection    Nn oO a fF WO ND    Run Stress Test    170    PSA Concepts    Transactional Engine   This test verifies the ability of your client to connect to the PSQL database through the M icroKernel  Engine    When you run this test  PSA attempts to perform basic database operations that are common to most  MicroKernel Engine applications  If your machine passes this test  then the following is verified    a TheMicroKernel Engine is responding   a Your client interface components are installed correctly       Thenetwork communication between the client and the database engine is functioning correctly      MicroKernel Engine applications running on your computer should function correctly     Relational Engine    This test verifies the
58.  names    ex  ownerl  owner2            Show owner names    Do not ask again for owner names  Tables requiring an owner name that is unknown will be skipped       Skip    The number of tables skipped is reported at the end of the repair operation in a dialog  box  The names of the tables skipped are written to the PCC Log        71    Using PSQL Control Center       Tables    Tables are the objects in which databases store data  PSQL contains two types of tables  data and system   Data tables are user created  N ewly created ones are empty and must be populated with data  System  tables are created and populated as required by the PSQ L database management system     Data Tables    Refer to the chapter Table Editor for a detailed discussion of data tables  That chapter also contains the  tasks pertaining to tables  such as creating one  deleting one  working with columns  foreign keys  and  so forth        Note To create a table in a database  database security must be turned off or you must have access  rights to create tables     System Tables    System tables appear in the PSQL Explorer under the System O bjects node  You may view properties of  them as explained in To view properties of atable     Table Properties    Table properties provides information about the table  Separate tabs let you view general properties   columns information  and indexes information  The following table describes the parameters listed on  the General tab     Table11 Table Properties on Genera
59.  on the page     Foreign Keys Page    The Foreign Keys page lets you add and modify foreign keys  See Foreign Keys Tasks for the tasks that  you perform on the page     SQL View Page    TheSQL View page lets you view the CREATE TABLE and ALTER TABLE statements that apply to the  table  Notethat SQL View isdisplay only  You cannot modify theSQL statements but you can copy them   See SQL View Tasks for the tasks that you perform on the page     TheSQL View page reflects changes made on the other pages as explained below     123    Table Editor    CREATE Statements    TheCREATE TABLE statement shows the SQL used to create the table  For anew table  one that has not  yet been saved  the CREATE TABLE statement reflects the SQL used to implement edits from the other  three tabbed dialogs  For example  if you were to create a new table named    MyNewTable    SQL View  initially shows the following CREATE statement        CREATE TABLE MyNewTable    y     If you wereto add two CHAR columns to the new table on the Columns page  SQL View reflects this in  the CREATE statement     CREATE TABLE MyNewTable     FirstName  CHAR 20     LastName  CHAR  30    y     Ifatable has been saved  already exists   the CREATE TABLE statement showstheSQL required to create  the table  For example  if you were to edit the    Course    table provided with the sample database  DEM ODATA  SQL View shows the following CREATE statements     CREATE TABLE Course     Name  CHAR 7  NOT NULL     Description  CHAR 5
60.  or group for whose account you want to grant the user policy    For example  you could grant the policy to the Pervasive Admin group      8 Click Add     The user name is added to the bottom pane  For example  the following image shows that the  Administrator has been added     23    Using PSQL    Name  el Administrator    Add   Check Names    9 ClickOK     The user name is added to the settings for local security policy        Act as part of the operating system          Local Effective  Assigned To Policy Setting Policy Setting   3 1 5 21 776561741 764733703 120  2660629 1001  Administrator O    10 Click OK   11 Exit the window for Local Security Settings  then exit Administrative Tools     Granting Administrator Rights on Linux     gt  To grant a user administrator rights on Linux    A user cannot remotely administer a server engine on Linux unless the user has first been set up asa  database user with administrative rights  You can perform thistask by using the btadmin utility at the  server command line     See also PSQL Account M anagement on Linux in Getting Started With PSQL for a complete discussion  of configuringthe environment for administrative rights     1 LogintotheLinuxserver aSpsal  Or aS root if the prats and 1D LIBRARY PATH Variables havebeen  set and exported   No other user is permitted to run btadmin     2 Create a new user with administrative rights by running btadmin   btadmin  p passwd a  user_name    For example  if you wanted to createan administra
61.  save action   The following set of characters are invalid and cannot be used          lt  gt      To allow afile to be moved between Windows and Linux  this set of invalid characters is the same for  those operating systems     91    UsingPSQL Control Center    File Open Dialog  Open SQL Document     The following image shows the File Open dialog ready to open the demodata sql sample file provided  with PSQL  Note the Preview  The Document field defaults to the location used for the previous File  Open or File Save     Open SQL Document      Enter SQL document name to open its contents using the specified encoding       Document   PSQL Demodata restore demodata sq   Encoding    windows 1252 v  Change default encoding    Preview      drop table billing    drop table class    drop table course    You can access the standard operating system file dialog by clicking Browse     File Save Dialog  Save SQL Document     The following image shows the File Save dialog  Preview does not apply  The Document field defaults to  the location used for the previous File Save or File Open        Save SQL Document     Enter SQL document name to save the contents using the specified encoding   Save To  C  Users Public Documents    Browse       Encoding    windows 1252    Change default encodin     A full path and file name is required to save a SQL document  You can access the standard operating  system file dialog by clicking Browse     Using the Standard Operating System Dialogs    If you pre
62.  save the changes to the structure of a table if the tableis open in SQL Editor  Close  the SQL Editor referencing the table then save the changes      gt  To save changes for all tables being edited  Note that you cannot undo or redo changes to tables once the tables have been saved   1 Click File  gt  SaveAll        Note You cannot savethe changes to thestructure of atableif the tableis open in SQL Editor  Close  the SQL Editors referencing the tables then save the changes         gt  To undo changes or to redo changes  1 Inthetoolbar  click to undo an action  click  gt  to redo an action     If multiple actions have occurred since the last save  you can repeatedly click the undo or redo  toolbar buttons  When no more actions are available for undo or redo  the toolbar button becomes  disabled     Note that you cannot undo or redo changes to a table once the table has been saved     130    Table Editor Tasks    Columns Tasks     gt  To insert a column between existing columns    1    Vs  ES  7    Ensure that the    Columns    page of Table Editor is active  If required  perform the steps for To work  with columns     Right click on an existing column row above which you want to insert a new column   Click Insert Column     The new column appears above the existing column row  The default name of the inserted column  is   columnn     where    n      sa number that automatically increments by one   The first column you  insert is columno0  the second column1 and so forth     
63.  set a primary key on a column that allows NULLs     1 Ensurethat the    Columns    page of Table Editor is active  If required  perform the steps for To work  with columns    2 Click  E   the column selection icon on the far left of the column row  for the desired column s    To select multiple columns  press and hold Shift or Ctrl then click  4  for the desired additional  columns    3 Click 4   the primary key icon     If the column s  is not a primary key  the action sets the column s  as a primary key   Ifthecolumn  or if any of the columns when multiple columns are selected  is already a primary key   the action removes the setting from all columns    For example  suppose that column 1 isa primary key and you want columns 1  2  and 3 to bethe  primary key  You press and hold Ctrl then click columns 1  2  and 3  When you click the primary key  icon  it is removed from column 1 but not added to columns 2 and 3  If you click the primary key  icon again  then columns 1  2  and 3 are designated as primary keys    4 Click File  gt  Save or  El before changing pages within Table Editor    Index Tasks     gt  To create an index    Only the database engine can add an index to an IDENTITY or SMALLIDENTITY column  However   you can include an IDENTITY or SM ALLIDENTITY column as part of a multiple segment index     Table Editor permits you to include an IDENTITY or aSMALLIDENTITY column in the Indexes list if  you have not saved the table  However  the DBM S returns an error when 
64.  statement last executed in SQL  Editor     Click Close     If Refresh Grid on Exitis enabled  the Grid displays therecord s  that you just added  assuming that  the last statement executed in SQL Editor was SELECT   FROM Billing               101581226 13 28 1996 4    5100 00  100 00 130312616  101811551 1 3 28 1996 4 3750 00 3250 00   313053054  102123022 1 3 28 1996 4 4000 00 3500 00 729772191    To delete row s  of data from the Grid       Caution Deleting a row from the Grid removes that record from physical storage  No undo feature  is available to reclaim the deleted record        Click any cell within the row  the record  that you want to delete     You may also select and delete multiple rows  To select multiple rows  press and hold down the Shift  or Ctrl key  then click acell in each desired row     Click Edit  gt  Delete or click ES   Click OK to confirm the deletion     165    SQL     gt     1    Editor    To enter a date  time  or timestamp data type in the Grid using scalar functions    Asa convenience  you can type the following scalar functions for date  time  and timestamp in Grid  cells     Data Type Scalar Function  As Typed in Grid Cell       Date e now    curdate      See also NOW     and CURDATE      both in SQL Engine Reference        Time   now    curtime      See also NOW     and CURTIME     in SQL Engine Reference        Timestamp   now      See also NOW     in SQL Engine Reference               gt     1     gt     1    166    1 The names are case i
65.  table     Click the Indexes page tab     To work with foreign keys    Perform the steps for To start Table Editor for an existing table or To start Table Editor for anew  table     Click the Foreign Keys page tab     To view SQL statements applicable to the table    Perform the steps for To start Table Editor for an existing table or To start Table Editor for anew  table     129    Table Editor    2 Click the SQL View page tab      gt  To view table data  14 If the Grid window view is not displayed  click Window  gt  Show View  gt  Grid     2 Perform the steps for To start Table Editor for an existing table or To start Table Editor for anew  table     3 By default  the Grid shows all of the data for the table  the result of a SELECT   FROM table  statement      If theGrid isempty but the table contains data  right click on any row in the Grid then click Refresh   Note that the Grid allows you to directly change database data by changing the valuesin the grid  cells  See Grid Tasks     gt  To identify tables with changes that have not been saved    1 Observe the Table Editor tab at the top  The tab contains the name of the table being created or  edited  An asterisk     precedes the name if any modifications have occurred to columns  indexes   or foreign keys but not yet saved     CE     gt  To save changes for the table being edited  Note that you cannot undo or redo changes to a table once the table has been saved   1 Click File  gt  Save or click  H         Note You cannot
66.  the Client or Server DSN for the PSQL database you wish  to access  as shown in the example below     Figure12 Excel Display of ODBC Source List         IT zx  Databases   Queries   OLAP Cubes       lt New Data Source gt    dBase Files   Word  Cancel    dBASE Files    DeluxeCD  Browse         Excel Files   FoxPro Files   Word     MS Access Database   superdatal   Neil o Dahan nat          El IV Use the Query Wizard to create edit queries    If the database you want does not appear in the ODBC Source list  see Before You Begin     4 Click OK  You may be prompted to login to the PSQL database  If the database is not secure  leave  the User and Password fields empty  Otherwise enter your assigned user name and password     5 TheQuery Wizard opens  Simply follow the wizard to select your options such as which tables to  query  how to filter and sort the data  and how you would like Excel to return the PSQ L data to you  for your use     Accessing Data Using Microsoft Access     gt  To access data from Microsoft Access  1 Open Microsoft Access     2 From the Access dialog box  choose Blank Access database as shown below  Click OK   N ote that  you may also add PSQL tables to an existing Access database      Figure13 Createa New Database using M icrosoft Access    Create a new database using       Blank Access database          Access database wizards  pages  and projects           amp  Open an existing file       E    Program Files     Northy vind Sample D atabase   xl           
67.  the Grid   Both Table Editor and SQL Editor use the Grid  See To view table data and Grid Window View for    further details     Text       The Text window view showsin a text format the result of running SQL statements  The text is display  only  You cannot change data values by changing the text  but you can copy text  SeeText Window View  for a detailed discussion     51    Using PSQL Control Center    Outline    The Outline window view allows you to view the SQL statements in a tree structure  The root node of  the tree is the same name as the name of the SQL Editor window view  See Outline Window View for a  detailed discussion     Notethat the editor must support an outlineor the Outline window view isnot available  Currently  only  SQL Editor supports an outline view     Table Editor    Table Editor allows you to add  delete  or change the characteristics of columns within a table  The table  may be one newly created or an existing table that you want to edit  See Table Editor for a detailed  discussion     Preferences   You can set general preferences for your experiencein PCC  You can also set preferences for the window  viewsin PCC or for the external tools     gt  To set general preferences for Grid   1 OnthePCC Window menu  click Preferences  Expand the PSQL nodeif it is not already expanded   2 Click General    The following are the options that can be set in the General Preferences       Always remove associated DSN entries  see Deleting DSN s         Do not pr
68.  the service for which you want to set a startup policy   3 Click Properties    4 Click the desired policy                    Startup Policy Meaning   Manual You must manually start the service after the operating system starts    Automatic The service automatically starts when the operating system starts    Disabled The service is removed from operation and is not affected by starting the operating system        5 Click OK  or Apply then OK      Services Properties  See To set services startup policy by using PCC in Advanced Operations Guide     56    Database Engines       Database Engines    You can use PCC to work with database engines that areon your machine or with remote server engines   To work with a remote server engine  you must introduce it to PCC  This procedure is called registering  the server     Your local server is automatically registered to PCC when you install PSQL v12  Thelocal server appears  in the PSQL Explorer as the first entry under the Engines node      gt  To register a remote server engine    1  2  3    In PSQL Explorer  right click on the top node in the tree  PSQL     Click New  gt  Server    Identify the server that you want to register    Type the name by which the server is identified on the network or type the IP address of the server   Click Finish    Theserver should now appear in the PSQL Explorer window of PCC under the Engines node     To log out from a database engine    These steps do not erase the data or database from the server  
69.  u joe  p password    To add user    acctadmin    with password    88s  kE5    to the local server named    sles2H R           pvnetpass  a sles2HR  u acctadmin  p p88sJkE5   To add user    bholly    with password    peggysue    to a remote server named    myserver      pvnetpass  a myserver  u bholly  p peggysue  To verify your entry was accepted  use the  d option   pvnetpass  d    This command results in        Server  myserver  User  bholly  Password   not displayed     To change the password with which you will connect to    myserver    from your Linux client   pvnetpass  m myserver  u bholly  p newpassword   To remove the entry for server    myserver      pvnetpass  r myserver    To add the default entry for users trying to connect to server    myserver    when no user specific entry  exists     pvnetpass  g  a myserver  u admin  p adminpassword                To add the default server entry in the user context  ps_HkEY USER      pvnetpass  a          u admin  p adminpassword       To add the default server entry in the machine context  ps key CONFIG    pvnetpass  g  a          u admin  p adminpassword    To authenticate from a Linux client to a Windows domain server  myserver  with a domain named     mydomain    and a user named    user1        pvnetpass  a myserver  u mydomainluserl  p userlpassword    218    Command Line Interface Utility Reference    rbidcli    Description  rbldcli is used to rebuild MicroKernel data files on your server     Synopsis    rbldcli    p
70.  updated  using the Function Executor   This is one way to confirm the contents of file ddf or field ddf     On somenon standard dictionaries  the DDFs file ddf  field ddf  and or index ddf do not exist  Such  dictionaries do not work with our products  For example  if you see a file called x file ddf  instead of  file ddf  you can assume your DDFs are non standard     Non standard DDFs are unlikely to work properly with PSQL Control Center or the relational engine     Can   mix and match DDFs from different databases    A complete set of DDF files must be considered a unit  No DDF file from one database may be  intermixed with DDFs from a different database    What happened to DDF Sniffer     DDF Sniffer was added to the PSQL product line with the acquisition of Smithwarein 1998  It isno  longer available as a separate product  Its functionality has since been largely replaced by the PSQL  Control Center and DDF Builder     235    Basic Troubleshooting    I have two similar Btrieve files  and   created a DDF for the first one  Since they are similar  can  l use the same DDF on the second Btrieve file     Theanswer depends on how similar thefiles are  If the two files differ only in thenumber of records  you  can usethesameD DF file If there are any differences at all in the number  order  names  or types of fields  or indexes  you cannot use the same DDF  In other words  you can only use the same DDF if the record  structure of the two files is identical     I have owner nam
71.  use only by 32 bit applications that are already coded to use  Client DSNs       No longer created by default when  host is specified with dsnadd   the  clntdsn option must be specified       32 bit Client DSNs are deprecated on Linux        Pervasive ODBC Interface          PSQL Server 64   bit    PSQL Client 64   bit    Frequently Asked Questions    Thefollowingtable answers some frequently asked questions  FAQs  about ODBC and DSN support for    Linux           Installation assigns ODBC drivers in odbcinst ini for use by new 32   bit and 64 bit DSNs      Connects to a local or remote named database        The recommended driver description to use for 32 bit and 64 bit  applications     Created by default with dsnadd       Not visible as    Engine DSNs    in ODBC Administrator running on a  Windows client        Table19 FAQsAbout ODBC and DSN Support for Linux       Question    Answer          What do   need to do about DSNs if   port  my 32 bit application to 64 bit     If the application uses DSN less connections that connect using    Pervasive ODBC  Client Interface     change the ODBC driver description to    Pervasive ODBC  Interface        If the application uses DSNs  you must create new DSNs that connect to a named  database        What is a so called    DSN less     connection        204       A DSN less connection is one that connects to a named database using the ODBC  driver    Pervasive ODBC Client Interface     for pre existing 32 bit applications  or the    
72.  website  for information about particular issues     In addition  client tracingis available for troubleshooting certain types of low level problems  Generally   low level tracing isnot required  so this type of tracing is intended for use by trained support staff  Your  product vendor or PSQL Support will explain how to conduct low level client tracing     Does garbage collection occur in the data files and indexes  For example  is space from deleted  records recovered or reused     Yes  space from deleted records is re used on subsequent inserts  Space in files is never de allocated back  to disk  If index balancing is turned on  unused space in index pages is also re used  See Rebuild Utility  Concepts in Advanced O perations Guide     Is database shadowing available  allowing a complete up to date second copy of the database  to exist on another drive or machine     PSQL does not contain specific functionality for this  but many customers have successfully used  hardware mirrored drive arrays and solutions like Vinca s  now acquired by Legato  Standby Server to  provide this functionality  Pervasive SQL 2000i SP3 and later supports the data replication product   DataExchange     What is the mechanism that allows the database to be backed up online  What happens if the  server goes down in the middle of a backup with many open transactions     Continuous Operations allows you to put a set of data files in a special    safe mode    so that they can be  safely backed up whi
73.  will be accessed by a  64 bit ODBC application running on a 64 bit client     isql64 acctspay    TheDSN is also named    acctspay    and specifies the ODBC driver description    Pervasive ODBC  Interface        The following example connects to a secured database named    payroll    as user    M aster    with a  password of    j77b99        isql payrollsecdb Master 377b99    207    Command Line Interface U tilities    TheDSN is named    payrollsecdb    and specifies the deprecated  legacy style ODBC driver description     Pervasive ODBC Engine Interface      You could also use   sql to test the DSN if the DSN had specified  the ODBC driver description    Pervasive ODBC Interface         The following example shows how to process multiple SQL statements  Suppose that you want to run  the following two queries against the DEM ODATA sample database     select count    from billing  select count    from person    Create a file  named    two queries sql    for discussion purposes  with the two lines  Include a blank line  as the last line in the file    Run the following command   cat two queries sql   isql demodata  b    Theresult is as follows        SQLRowCount returns 1  1 rows fetched          SQLRowCount returns 1  1 rows fetched       Note the use of the  b option to suppress the prompting information from the output  Without the  b  option  the result is as follows     Connected     sql statement  help  tablename   quit             SQLRowCount returns 1  1 rows fetched  S
74.  with which you could create the same table  The ALTER  TABLE panel reflects any editing changesto an existing tablethat you make with Table Editor  When you  save the table changes  the ALTER TABLE panel is cleared and the ALTER statement s  becomes part of  the CREATE TABLE statement     The SQL View page is further explained within the context of the tasks that you can perform  See SQL  View Tasks     126       Table Editor Tasks       Table Editor Tasks    This section explains the tasks that you perform with Table Editor  The tasks are divided into the  following categories                    Category Description   General Tasks Orient you to the overall use of Table Editor  Columns Tasks Apply to using the Columns page   Indexes Tasks Apply to using the Indexes page   Foreign Keys Tasks Apply to using the Statistic page   SQL View Tasks Apply to using the SQL View page          Note You cannot save the changes to the structure of a table if any queriesin SQL Editor are holding  the table    open     Close the SQL Editor holding open the table then save the changes        General Tasks    General tasks apply to the overall use of the tool     Getting Started    To start Table Editor for an existing table   To start Table Editor for a new table   To work with columns   To work with indexes   To work with foreign keys   To view SQL statements applicable to the table    Data    To view table data   To identify tables with changes that have not been saved  To save changes fo
75.  you remove locations from the list  The locations must be on the same  server where the database engine is running     Specify the location in the same manner as for the dictionary locations     General  General contains the following property settings       Bound Database   a Integrity Enforced   a Long Metadata  V2 metadata     Relational Constraints    Bound Database    Indicates whether or not the database is bound  Binding a database prevents the DD Fs or data files from  being used in another database and prevents a data file from having two or more different table  definitions within the same database     For moreinformation about bound databases  refer to Bound Database versus Integrity Enforced     Integrity Enforced    Specifies whether integrity constraints  security  RI  and triggers  are enforced on the database  These  constraints apply to Btrieve access to the data files as well as ODBC SQL access     See Setting Up Referential Integrity and Interactions Between Btrieve and Relational Constraints     64    Databases    Long Metadata  V2 metadata     This property is read only and shows whether V2 metadata was specified when the database was created   If it was  the    Long M etadata    option is selected  Note that V2 metadata is also referred to as    long  metadata       Relational Constraints    Relational Constraints displays a matrix that lists the relational constraints in effect for the database  See  Interactions Between Btrieve and Relational Constrai
76.  your data files are not affected    Why do I not see in PCC PSQL Explorer the    plug in    product that I just installed or upgraded   See Situations Requiring That You Clear PCC Cache     What type of client install should   do    If you are not sure  always select complete  This option performs a standard installation  which makes it  easier to troubleshoot if problems occur    How can I be sure what service pack level of client I am running    If you areusing PSQL v12  start M onitor or Maintenance  choose Help then About from the menu  and  check the Build Level    Is PSQL supported on a Terminal Server     Support for both the Server and Workgroup engines on Terminal Server has been available since  Pervasive SQL 2000i  SP 4  Pervasive SQL 2000i  SP 3 provided support for the Server engine   Pervasive SQL 2000i  SP 2 provided supports only for the client software     Can   install PSQL in a Failover environment  or    Can I install PSQL in a Clustering environment     Yes  PSQL is cluster compatible with M icrosoft Failover Clustering  M icrosoft Cluster Service  and Linux  Heartbeat  See the chapter High Availability Support in Advanced Operations Guide     Can I install PSQL in a Load Balancing environment     That is not supported at this time     Can l install PSQL on a server running Btrieve v6 x or earlier     No  you cannot run PSQL and Btrieve 6 x on the same computer at the same time     How do I keep my Workgroup Engine from starting up automatically when I r
77. 0     Credit Hours  USMALLINT    Dept Name  CHAR 20  NOT NULL  3  CREATE INDEX Course Name ON Course   Name      CREATE UNIQUE INDEX DeptName ON Course  Dept Name                                                                                ALTER Statements    When you are editing an existing table  the ALTER TABLE statements show what SQL is used to  implement edits from the other three Table Editor pages  For example  suppose that you edit the     Course    table provided with the sample database D EM ODATA  On the Index page  you changethesort  order for the    Name    index segment from ascending to descending  SQL View shows the following  ALTER statements     DROP INDEX Course Course Name   CREATE INDEX Course Name ON Course  Name  DESC       Saving a table clears the ALTER TABLE statements because no changes are pending                          124    Table Editor Graphical U ser Interface       Table Editor Graphical User Interface    The Table Editor graphical user interface  GUI  provides work areas  called pages  for the following         Columns Page     Indexes Page     Foreign Keys Page    SQL View Page    Columns Page    The Columns page can be considered the primary page of Table Editor just as columns and rows are  central to tables  The following image shows the Columns page of Table Editor  The table below the  image describes the GUI objects  Click on an area of the image for which you want more information     See also Columns Tasks for the tasks that yo
78. 203  SS AA S 205   ls a ges WA a VSR we Wo SE nd E ande e oil e a 206  Descriptio ne sonona od a da Fea eae OE a E k 206  SYNOPSIS eks a ee ean YS aa eo Pee eae A Cog a ty Aen Leds 206  OPUONS 7  radioteatro 7 SEERA a ES as 207  COMMAS saree sees a on nthe WE RE De OE a EANA aa a A 207  NOLS aro rat eae a ANE ee tee Sate E Gait ohn Coe Qe EIA 207  El Vouk  a oie ta tack esas Ane a Sate a at be Gi 207  SOG ASO wat siee a ad O stated ates 209  licgetauthi anan Stes  a ae hr aks hen is se wegen a ie km id Gente kt i Bae    210  DeSeriptiOn  ss  4a bats eae dite  adh tes ii A i ech PR i   ta 210  SYNOPSIS  4 5 oF Ss RA eas eS he Raed dhe Ee Ba a Bede 210  OPTIONS e se Pac cere ate reas   E nse pee PAA ae eae Na Bee AE 210  See Alo  Sas  Sir cas sce  ae Me A a 210  PSC ee ie tcl ea abba  ise Nee o op la ene wad 211  Descriptiva visa  p84 See da A eh a A Ae eae eas 211  SYNOPSIS  ass  alte O 211  OPTIONS  tat Bt cage t os ie a ia dead Sante de te Saha  211  Return  Goes  4 34 4 na ee ob Ew eared 6 ahs dg eee EEE EE peed eae bh 212  pregadit Mein  a a Spas  a te GEA cae 213  Description ca hat 3   lt 0 Noe aaa ls ees  li es pon etna cate oe A 213  SYNOPSIS  de sense sc a DS Ea OR ek St ye eee tte 4 213  Optio     tea ees st ii io DA ice be 213  A A a eee a a ee 214  Descriptions 203 4 ote s tyra ca aah oid tek enol sa arene eee  Shek Ertan Gua A mad ak 214  SYNOPSIS  Bee a et Eo whe Soa tre ea  eae ea ie aa Me Geeta fk os 214  OPUON Seri  sacd hide Nah tee ees es ea ak A ee de i   a
79. 59 1  CP437  CP1252  UTF 8  CP1250  CP1251   CP1253  CP1254  CP1255  CP1256  CP1257  CP1258  CP737  CP775  CP850  CP852  CP855   CP857  CP858  CP862  CP866  CP932  or EUCJP       To list all database names with full information     dbmaint 1  a  To modify the security policy of the DefaultD B database to M ixed       dbmaint m  nDefaultDB  sMixed    199    Command Line Interface U tilities  See Also    dsnadd  butil 1   btadmin 1   syslogd 1   smb conf 5   Database Code Page and Client Encoding in Advanced Operations Guide     200    Command Line Interface Utility Reference    dsnadd    Description    Dsnadd simplifies the setup of a new ODBC data source to connect to aPSQL database  It modifies the  odbc ini file by providing the appropriate properties for the new data source     PSQL follows the UNIXODBC standard by using the odbcinst ini file in  usr local psql etc to specify a  32 bit and a64 bit ODBC driver  DSN sthat referencethe    PervasiveO DBC Interface    driver description  point to the odbcinst ini information from the odbc ini file  A single DSN can be used by both a 32 bit  application and a 64  bit application  See also Notes     Optionally  dsnadd provides options that let you create legacy style DSN s that specify a 32 bit driver  namein odbc ini rather than pointing to odbcinst ini  However  such DSN s are not accessible to 64 bit  applications     Synopsis  a To createa DSN on the server that connects to a named database   dsnadd  dsn myDSN  db DBname    T
80. A and click Next   In the Log File field  type a path to the PSA logfile  or browse to the desired location  click        If you want alogfilethat containsinformation only about the current PSA session  clear the Append  to log file option     You can also specify a different name for the log file  but the name applies only for that session of  PSA  PSA defaults the name to PSALog txt the next time you execute PSA     177    PSQL System Analyzer  PSA    gt  To view the log file at the completion of PSQL System Analyzer    Click View Log File to display the PSA log file   A summary of the tasks PSA completed is listed for you     178    chapter    Command Line Interface _    Utilities                Using PSQL Command Line Interface Utilities    This chapter discusses command line interface  CLI  utilities available for PSQL   The chapter contains the following sections     a CLI Utilities Overview      Command Line Interface Utility Reference    179    Command Line Interface U tilities       CLI Utilities Overview    In addition to providing GUI utilities  PSQL provides anumber of command line interface  CLI   utilities that you can use  In most cases  these utilities duplicate functionality you can perform with GUI  utilities    For default locations of PSQ L files  see Where arethePSQL files installed  in Getting Started With PSQL   Platforms that Include CLI Utilities   These utilities are provided in the following installations         Windows   Server  Workgroup  and a l
81. A logout only disconnects the  communication between the database engine and the PCC on your computer     In PSQL Explorer  expand the Engines node   Right click on the server engine from which you want to log out   Click Logout  name      Name reflects the name of the user currently logged in to the server through PCC  Nameis  anonymous if no specific user name and password were provided for alogin     Any nodes expanded for the database engine are collapsed     To reconnect to a database engine  In PSQL Explorer  expand the node in the tree for the server engine     To log in to a database engine  Right click on the database namein the PCC PSQL Explorer then click Logout  name      Name reflects the name of the user currently logged in to the server through PCC  By default  name  is anonymous  meaning that no specific user name and password were provided for a login     Any nodes expanded for the database engine are collapsed   Right click on the database name    Click Login    Type a User Name and Password    You can leave these blank to log in as anonymous    Click OK     57    Using PSQL Control Center    To delete a remote database engine    Certain situations  such as amachineno longer in use  can necessitate deleting a remote database  engine     In PSQL Explorer  expand the Engines node    Right click on the remote database engine that you want to delete   Click Delete    Note that the deletion occurs immediately without further prompting     Database Engine Properti
82. CANNOT_ACCEPT_CTRL 32779  BTI_SERVICE_CONTINUE_PENDING 32772  BTI_SERVICE_DATABASE_LOCKED 32780  BTI_SERVICE_DEPENDENCY_DELETED 32783  BTI_SERVICE_DEPENDENCY_FAIL 32784  BTI_SERVICE_DISABLED 32782  BTI_SERVICE_DOES_NOT_EXIST 32785  BTI_SERVICE_DUP_NAME 32776  BTI_SERVICE_EXISTS 32786  BTI_SERVICE_INVALID_CTRL 32789  BTI_SERVICE_INVALID_NAME 32777  BTI_SERVICE_MARKED_FOR_DELELE 32790  BTI_SERVICE_NOT_ACTIVE 32787  BTI_SERVICE_PAUSE_PENDING 32773  BTI_SERVICE_PAUSED 32774  BTI_SERVICE_REQUEST_TIMEOUT 32788  BTI_SERVICE_RUNNING 32771  BTI_SERVICE_START_PENDING 32769  BTI_SERVICE_STOP_PENDING 32770  BTI_SERVICE_STOPPED 32768                212    Command Line Interface Utility Reference    psregedit    Description    psregedit is used to manage the PSQL Registry on Linux  You must be root user or a member of the  group pvsw to make changes to the PSQL Registry     Synopsis    psregedit    key keyname    r      key keyname  value valuename    set  key keyname   type type  value    set  key keyname  value valuename   type type  value   delete  key keynam    delete  key keyname  value valuenam    export  key keyname   file filename     import   file filename     Where     keynameisin the form PS HKEY Subkey and PS_H KEY is one of the following  PS HKEY_CONFIG   PS HKEY_CONFIG_64  PS HKEY_CLASSES  PS HKEY_CLASSES 64  or PS HKEY_USER  Subkey  is a subordinate key under a major key                       valuename is the name assigned to the Registry value or    default      typeisPS RE
83. Center  PCC  is an easy to use  graphical tool designed to help you create and  manipulate databases and control your DBM S  It allows you to access nearly all the functions of the  product from one place  For a tour of PCC  see Chapter 3  Using PSQL Control Center     Utilities    The PSQL database engines come with a variety of graphical and command line tools designed to  provide support for testing  configuring  and manipulating the many features and options provided by  PSQL  Mostof theutilities run on Windowsand allow remote function to Linux databaseserver engines        Tablel Summary of PSQL Utilities  Utility name Supported Description  platforms       Capacity Usage Viewer    Windows and Linux    Monitors concurrent sessions and data usage for all database engines   See Capacity Usage Viewer in Advanced Operations Guide        Configuration property  dialogs within PCC    Windows and Linux    Manipulates settings for PSQL client and server components  See  Configuration Reference in Advanced Operations Guide           DDF Builder Windows Allows you to view  create  and change PSQL data dictionary files  DDFs   without modifying the underlying data file  See Getting Started with DDF  Builder in DDF Builder User s Guide    Defragmenter Windows and Linux   Monitors statistics on data file fragmentation  See Monitoring Data File    Fragmentation in Advanced Operations Guide        Export Table Schema    Windows and Linux    Exports a schema for a particular table  or t
84. Commands  add  a Add database name  del  d Delete database name  Vist  1 List database names    198    Command Line Interface Utility Reference    Options   b Create bound database     c codepage Set the database code page  Zero specifies the server default   c 0     i Create database with relational integrity   e Do not create dictionary files for database   nDBName Specify database name   1dictpath Specify dictionary path   ddatapath Specify datapath   a Show detail information about dbnames in database list     ssecuritymode Specify Btrieve security policy for database  Valid choices are  Classic  Mixed  Database    Examples    To create a database named    TEST    with relational integrity          dbmaint a  i  nTEST         Note Unless a datapath is specified  thenew database will bein the default location   PVSW_ROOT   data  Likewise  if a dictionary path is not specified  the dictionary will be created in the default  location        To delete the same database     dbmaint d  nTEST    To create a database named    mydbase    with a database code page of CP 932        o      dbmaint a  nmydbase  c CP932  For the same database  to set the code page to the default operating system code page        o      dbmaint m  nmydbase  c 0    To see a list of valid code pages  specify an invalid code page and dbmaint returns a list of valid ones      a      dbmaint m  nmydbase  c xzy  Dbmaint returns something similar to the following     Bad code page  xyz  should be  ASCII  IS088
85. Course Name  IN DICTIONARY ON  Course    Name                   CREATE INDEX  DeptName  IN DICTIONARY ON  Course    Dept Name        See also IN DICTIONARY in SQL Engine Reference           USING Clause  TheUSING keyword allows you to associate a table with a particular data file     77    UsingPSQL Control Center    An exported statement looks similar to the following        CREATE TABLE  Course  USING  Course mkd                 Name  CHAR 7  NOT NULL CASE          Description  CHAR 50  CASE     Credit Hours  USMALLINT               Dept Name  CHAR 20  NOT NULL CASE  y   CREATE UNIQUE INDEX  Course Name  IN DICTIONARY ON  Course    Name                               CREATE INDEX  DeptName  IN DICTIONARY ON  Course    Dept Name        See USING in SQL Engine Reference           Plain Statement    The    plain    statement omitsthelN DICTIONARY clause and the USING clause  The plain CREATE  TABLE syntax is useful to duplicate an existing table by simply changing the table name or to create the  same table in a different database     An exported statement looks similar to the following        CREATE TABLE  Course                 Name  CHAR 7  NOT NULL CASE          Description  CHAR 50  CASE     Credit Hours  USMALLINT            Dept Name  CHAR 20  NOT NULL CASE             CREATE UNIQUE INDEX  Course Name  ON  Course    Name                                  CREATE INDEX  DeptName  ON  Course    Dept Name        See CREATE TABLE in SQL Engine Reference     Exporting a Schema 
86. DSNs  new applications or revised 32 bit applications should  create a DSN that connects to a named database using  db      For use with deprecated  legacy style Client DSNs  Name of an Engine DSN on the PSQL  Server     The following options are typically used only for application development and testing      dsn desc     desc    drv desc    drv path     drv    odbc ini     ini     202    dsnadd provides a default DNS description in odbc ini  If you want to override the default  description  use this option to specify a descriptive string of your choosing  If the descriptive  string contains the space character  you must quote the entire string with double quotes     dsnadd handles the driver descriptions based on the absence or presence of the  db     clntdsn and  engdsn options  If specified  must be one of the following       Pervasive ODBC Interface  e Pervasive ODBC Client Interface  e Pervasive ODBC Engine Interface    The path where the driver libraries are located  The default is  usr local psql lib  HOME lib     ODBC  ini file name  for example   usr local psql etc odbc  ini     Command Line Interface Utility Reference    Examples    Thefollowing example creates a server side DSN named    acctingdb    that connects to a local database  named    regionlaccting       dsnadd  dsn acctingdb  db regionlaccting   Thefollowing examplecreates aclient sideDSN named    USI nvoices    that connects to a database named     DomesticO rders    on a remote server named    USInvent
87. Depending on the Linux distribution  the appearance of PCC may differ  but functionality is the same     44    An Overview of PSQL Control Center    Installing PCC    On Windows platforms  PCC isinstalled by default when you install a database engine or a client  See  PSQL Optional Features in Getting Started With PSQL     On Linux  PCC isincluded in the full install  See Full Installations in Getting Started With PSQL     Starting PCC on Windows    Access Control Center from the operating system Start menu or Apps screen  You may also run the  executable file pcc exe     Starting PCC On Linux    You start PCC by running the executable script file pec from a command prompt  The script fileis  located  by default installation  in the usr local psql bin directory     We recommend that you start PCC from a command prompt and not by double clicking the script file  using a file browser application  See Table 6  Troubleshooting Guide for Running PCC     Thefollowing requirements must be met to start PCC on Linux   Table5 Requirements for Starting PCC on Linux             Requirement Discussion  PSQL server or client A compatible PSQL server or client must already be installed on the same machine   X Server access The xhost command controls which clients can access X Windows on the current    machine  By default  xhost turns on access control  This means that only the user who  starts X Windows could start PCC     You may turn off X Windows client restrictions by typing xhost   at 
88. E  PCC usesit  If you wish to create a new database but use existing data files  you must know  the location of the data files on the server     To create up a DSN on a remote machine  you must possess administrator rights on theremote machine  that houses the database you wish to access  You must have OS system rights to create a System DSN on  the local machine     Setting Up Database Access on Windows     gt  To set up database access on Windows  1 Follow the steps listed in To register a remote server engine    Existing databases with a DBNAM E on the registered server can then be accessed from PCC   2 Optionally  follow the steps listed in To create a new database    The new database can then be accessed from PCC      gt  To set up ODBC database access on Windows  1 Follow the steps listed in To register a remote server engine     Existing databases with a DBNAM E and a DSN on the registered server can then be accessed from  PCC     2 Optionally  follow the steps listed in To create anew database and ensure that the Create 32 bit  Engine DSN option is selected     By default  PCC creates a 32 bit system DSN with the same name as the database name  The new  database has a DSN associated with it and can be accessed through ODBC      gt  To set up Engine DSNs using ODBC Administrator    Note that the ODBC Interface GU Is for 32 bit and 64 bit Windows operating systems are different  The  one for 32 bit DSNs allows you to specify an Engine DSN  The 64 bit interface driver su
89. Ex Pervasive SQL   F Local Client  Ep Engines  E  2 RASPUTIN  anonymous   E A Databases  H  DEFAULTDB  OE FDEMODATA  Master     E3 Tables  El  Ea Views   3 Stored Procedures                               9 User Defined Functions  H E Triggers  H E System Objects   5 8 PYIDEODB  Master     2 Inthe Databases list double click DEM ODATA  then double click Tables   3 Double click the Dept table from the Tables list     Figure8 Selectingthe Dept Tablein DEM ODATA    Grid   8    Dept                 Pervasive  SOL   eF Local Client                         E E Engines Accounting  B g RASPUTIN  anonymous  Anthropology  E e Databases At  H 6 DEFAULTDB    E  DEMODATA  Master  Biology  B  Tables Chemistry  E Billing Communication  E Class French  E Course German  Computer Science  rl History    By default  a    SELECT   FROM    query isrun and thetable results are displayed in an active grid as  shown in Figure 9     The data displayed in the active grid that loads is updateable  That is  changes you make to the data  in that grid are stored to the database     34    Accessing Data on a Remote Engine U sing PCC    Figure9 Displaying the Dept Tablein DEM ODATA    File Edit Tools SQL Window Help  B  Outline   3    Melel   E BOSS   ed BNE     8  Dept    Ta Pervasive SOL     aial  E Dept x Execute in Grid     select   from  Dept                              select   from  Dept         9 Pervasive  SQL   F Local Client   E Microkemel Router     Engines  E E RASPUTIN  anonymous      Databases
90. G_STR  or PS REG_UINT32  or PS REG_UINT64   value is the value assigned to valuename    filename is the name of a file  which may include a path     Options    key Get the key value  If  value is not specified  then the entire key contents are displayed   To view all subkeys  specify  r  for recursive      set  key Set the key value  If  value is not specified  the default value will be set  VALUE must  be appropriate to the TYPE specified  PS_REG_STR is assumed if  type is not  specified     delete  key Delete the specified key or value  If  value is not specified  then the entire key and all  subkeys are deleted     export  key Export the given key  including all values and subkeys to standard output or to the    named file      import   file filename  Import keys and values from either the standard input or from the named file     213    Command Line Interface Utilities    psregsvr    Description    psregsvr is used to register components in the PSQL registry     Synopsis  psregsvr    s      u      Options   8   y   f file  filenme    214     f file     filename      Silent  Do not print any status or error messages   Unregister  If not specified  register is assumed   Specifies a text file with PCOM modules listed one per line     Specifies a single PCOM module to register     Command Line Interface Utility Reference    pvdbpass    Description    pvdbpass allows users to change their passwords for secure databases without administrator  intervention     Synopsis   Theutil
91. H  M Additional modules  TF Additional locations   el    winsock  dll xX Xx  wsock32 dll xl      a  z m I Include subfolders       If In Memory is selected  PSA searches for all PSQ L components loaded in memory  regardless of  whether they are located in the PATH or other specified locations     If you want to add components to the search list  do the following     a  Click Additional modules  if it is not already selected     b  Type the file name  without a drive letter or path  in the text box    c  Click Add Component 4     d  If the component you added is not in the path  add the path to the searched locations   If you want to add more paths to the search locations  do the following     a  Click Additional locations   b  Click Add Location J   c  Browse to the location using the directory selector and select the desired location   d  Click OK   e  If you also want all directories below the location to be searched  click Include subfolders   4 Click Next   5 View thegrid that shows the components found   If files of the same name are detected  the multiple occurrences are marked with an icon on the left  side  E   If you see multiple occurrences of a component  you can adjust the list so that the occurrences sort  together  To do this  click the Module column heading     M ultiple occurrences of a file does not necessarily represent a problem with your configuration   Their identification can help you troubleshoot issues with components depending on thesituation   For ex
92. Have a DSN Available     a  f you are connecting from a client workstation or from a Workgroup workstation to a server  you  must haveaClient DSN defined on your workstation for the given remote database  Information on  how to create a Client DSN is provided in Setting Up Client Access from a Windows Client    m If you havea Workgroup engine installed on your computer  you may havea DSN defined on your  computer for either local or remote databases  Information on how to createa DSN is provided in  Setting Up Database Access on Windows          Note Theinstructions in this section apply only to PSQL v12  not to previous versions     Accessing Data Using Microsoft Excel     gt  To access PSQL data using Excel    Ya       Tip You must have the PSQ L client or any version of the PSQL engine installed on the computer  where you are using Excel        4 Start Excel     2 From the Data menu  choose   Get External Data  gt  New Database Query as shown below     Figurell Accessing PSQL Data using M icrosoft Excel    i all     Eile Edit View Insert Format Tools   Data Window Help    D a SRY    amp  Ba 024 sot      Filter   Subtotals       Text to Columns                               ia PivotTable and PivotChart Report             Get External Data  gt  eey Run Saved Query                36    Accessing Data via ODBC From Other Applications    3 TheChoose Data Source box lists the defined data sources for any ODBC drivers that are installed  on your computer  From this list  click on
93. Indexes    page of Table Editor is active  If required  perform the steps for To work  with indexes     2 Click the desired index in the Indexes list   The Index Segment Details displays  listing all the designated index segments   3 Click the desired index segment     4 With the index segment you want to delete selected  click Deletein the Index Segment Details  Columnslist     Index Segment Details    Ounique Partial  Normal    Allow Modifications    Columns SortOrder   Delete    Building_Name Ascending   Number x   Capacity Ascending    p    5 Click File  gt  Save or  El before changing pages within Table Editor      gt  To arrange the order of index segments    1 Ensure that the    Indexes    page of Table Editor is active  If required  perform the steps for To work  with indexes     2 Click on the desired index in the Indexes list   The Index Segment Details displays   3 Click the index segment you want to reorder     4 Click Up to movethe segment toward the top of the segment grouping  or Down to move the  segment toward the bottom     5 Click File  gt  Save or  E  before changing pages within Table Editor     143    Table Editor     gt  To specify a sort order for an index    For detailed information about sort order  see Sort Order in the PSQL Programmer sGuide  which is part  of the PSQL Software Developer s Kit  SDK      1 Ensure that the    Indexes    page of Table Editor is active  If required  perform the steps for To work  with indexes     2 Click on the desired
94. Oo a A WO N       3  Caution If your database has security turned on and you change from Classic security policy to  M ixed or Database  all users are prevented from accessing the database until you create database user  accounts and privileges for them        84    Groups  U sers  and Security     gt  To use an existing database  including the pre defined DefaultDB  with your PSQL    rk OO N      files   In PSQL Explorer  expand the Engines node  then the Databases node   Right click on the desired database then click Properties    Click Directories then click New    Type a path for the PSQL files then click OK     If your files are spread over many directories  specify a high level directory that they all have in  common  You can specify a root level if necessary  but doing so includes in the database all PSQL   files at the root level and its subordinate directories     You do not need to enter every directory  just the lowest level directory that is common to all Btrieve  files you want to include in the database     Turn security on for the database as explained in General Tasks   Set permissions for groups and users and explained in User and Group Tasks     User and Group Tasks     gt     To create a new group using PSQL Explorer    Note that you cannot add a group to another group     1  2  3  4  5    y    a fF Y N      Turn security on for the database as explained in General Tasks   Expand thenodes for the database    Right click the Groups node then click New  gt  G
95. PSQL v12       User s Guide    Guide to Using PSQL    ifIctian    disclaimer    trademarks    ACTIAN CORPORATION LICENSES THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION  PRODUCT TO YOU OR YOUR COM PANY SOLELY ON AN    ASIS    BASISAND SOLELY IN  ACCORDANCE WITH THE TERMSAND CONDITIONS OF THE ACCOM PANYING  LICENSE AGREEMENT  ACTIAN CORPORATION MAKESNO OTHER WARRANTIES  WHATSOEVER  EITHER EXPRESS OR IM PLIED  REGARDING THE SOFTWARE OR THE  CONTENT OF THE DOCUMENTATION  ACTIAN CORPORATION HEREBY EXPRESSLY  STATESAND YOU OR YOUR COM PANY ACKNOWLEDGESTHAT ACTIAN  CORPORATION DOESNOT MAKE ANY WARRANTIES  INCLUDING  FOR EXAMPLE   WITH RESPECT TO MERCHANTABILITY  TITLE  OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR  PURPOSE OR ARISING FROM COURSE OF DEALING OR USAGE OF TRADE  AMONG  OTHERS     Btrieve  Client Server in a Box  and Pervasive are registered trademarks of Actian Corporation   Built on Pervasive Software  D ataExchange  M icroKernel Database Engine  MicroKernel Database  Architecture  Pervasive SQL  Pervasive PSQL  Solution Network  Ultralight  and ZD BA are trademarks of  Actian Corporation    Microsoft  MS DOS  Windows  Windows 95  Windows 98  WindowsNT  WindowsM illennium  Windows  2000  Windows 2003  Windows 2008  Windows 7  Windows 8  Windows Server 2003  Windows Server  2008  Windows Server 2012  Windows XP  Win32  Win32s  and Visual Basic are registered trademarks of  Microsoft Corporation    NetWare and Novell are registered trademarks of N ovell  Inc  NetWare Loadable M odule  NLM  Novell  DOS
96. QL gt                              SQLRowCount returns 1  1 rows fetched       208    Command Line Interface Utility Reference    See Also  dsnadd    209    Command Line Interface U tilities    licgetauth    Description    Thelicgetauth utility is used in thesecond phaseof theoffline authorization process used for authorizing  product keys  This utility is used in conjunction with clilcadm to complete the offline authorization  process     Synopsis  licgetauth exe  output filenameath   Options  output filename ath The name for the authorization output file   See Also  clilcadm    Considerations For No Internet Access    210    Command Line Interface Utility Reference    psc    Description    Psc stands for PSQL service controller  The utility retrieves and sets control information about PSQL  services     You must have administrator authority to run psc     Synopsis   pse  lt  start   stop   restart   query   getpolicy  gt  servicename  or   psc setpolicy servicename  lt  automatic   manual   disabled  gt   Options    A service specifies the name of a program  routine  or process that performs a specific system function  to support other programs  particularly at a low level  close to the hardware   Servicename specifies the  name given to the service key in the registry  Note that service key name may differ    and in most cases  does differ    from the service display name     The options described below are case  insensitive     start Starts a PSQL service running   stop T
97. SQL Server or Workgroup  PCC contains separate optionsin theTools  menu to start the 32 bit or the 64 bit ODBC Administrator  If an ODBC Administrator is already open   Windows defaults to it  That is  if the 32 bit ODBC Administrator is open and you attempt to start the  64 bit one  Windows displays the 32 bit version  and vice versa   This is a limitation of the Windows  Operating system  not PSQL     Figures 4 shows possible DSN configurations     26    Setting U p ODBC Database Access    Figure4 ExampleDSN Configurations    Engine with Local Data       Database  Engine                               Computer    Client Server    Database   _  Database   Database  e    Client Client DSN  lt  gt  Name Engine  Data    Files                                                                Client Computer or Remote Server Computer  Server Computer with  Client Application    Servers and Clients    PSQL servers are also clients  The client components of PSQL are installed with every Server engine or  Workgroup engine  So you can use your server machine to connect to other servers as a client  PSQL  clients can connect to remote machines where a PSQL Server engine is installed     Data Source Names    TheODBC client server architecture calls for the naming of each specific data set so that it can be  referred to by a well known name  There are generally three ways to create DSN s     1 CreateaDSN from the server console   2 CreateaDSN remotely from a client machine     3 CreateaClie
98. Table Editor is active  If required  perform the steps for To view  SQL statements applicable to the table    2 Position the cursor in the desired statement view  CREATE Statement or ALTER Statement     Ya    With the mouse  select the desired text   Press and hold the right mouse button then    drag    across  the desired lines         Tip You can press Ctrl A to select all of the text        Right click then click Copy  or press Ctrl C      To maximize or restore view of SQL statements    Ensurethat the   SQL View    page of Table Editor is active  If required  perform the steps for To view  SQL statements applicable to the table     For thedesired statement view  CREATE Statement or ALTER Statement  click theicon in the upper  right corner of the view                 Icon Action  Maximizes the statement view   O       Restores the statement view to its size prior to maximizing        i       147    Table Editor    148    SQL Editor       A Tour of the SQL Editor    Thetopics in this chapter include     m SQL Editor Concepts     Working with Common SQL Objects       SQL Editor Used in SQL View Tab of Table Editor      SQL Editor Tasks       chapter          149    SQL Editor       SQL Editor Concepts    This section contains the following topics     m SQL Editor Concepts     Working with Common SQL Objects       SQL Editor Used in SQL View Tab of Table Editor      SQL Editor Tasks    Overview    SQL Editor is one of the editors within PSQL Control Center  PCC   The editor a
99. UIdGs as std was Rabie dg woh EE Ee pe are e 13  Advanced Operations Guide    2    o    oo    13  SQL Engine Reference     aoaaa eee 13  Status Codes and Messages         oo      o     ee e 13  Additional Informati0N            o    ooo    13  File System Security 54 02 sa ade et yea ad SORE eee eed BRE SR oe ae ae 14   2  Using PSOL  lt a a Busi are ara wes eno E 15  A Walk through of Basic U ser Tasks  Starting and Stopping the Database Engine     1       cc ee 16   Starting and Stopping the Server Engine on a Windows Server                    16  Starting and Stopping the Workgroup Engineon Windows                      18  Starting and Stopping the DatabaseEngineon Linux            ce ee ee 19  Granting Administrative Rights for the DatabaseEngine         0    cee ee ee 20  Tasks Requiring Administrative Rights       6       es 20  How Administrative Rights are Granted      6    es 20  Rights Within an Active Directory Environment     saaa a ees 20  Rights Provided to non Administrative Users     oaaae es 21  Tasks for Granting Administrative Rights      aoaaa a 21  Granting Administrative Rights on a Windows Server    aoaaa ee eee eee 21  Granting Administrator Rights on LINUX   saaa  o ooo    24  Loggingin as Administrator on any platform      aaa es 24  Setting Up ODBC DatabaseAccessS   1  oaa 26  ODBC Standards siriar a r A eee Oe A E eG EY ere ROO 26  Servers ad Clients    oana aaa 27  Data SourceNames     2    1  o    ooo    27  Internal DatabaseName    oaaae 27    A
100. a terminal  window        Java Runtime Environment  JRE  The JRE components required to run PCC are installed as part of PSQL  PCC uses  the    local    version of the JRE installed as part of PSQL              If you have met the requirements to run PCC and still are having difficulty running the utility  refer to  the following troubleshooting guide     Table6 Troubleshooting Guide for Running PCC          Troubleshooting Condition Discussion   You receive the error This error typically occurs if you try to start PCC by double clicking the      java lang UnsatisfiedLinkError   script file using a file browser application  Start PCC from a command  prompt     This error can result if the LD_LIBRARY_PATH variable is not set  The  PCC script sets this variable for you  You may also explicitly set the variable  with the following command     export LD LIBRARY _PATH  LD_LIBRARY_PATH  usr   local psal lib             45    Using PSQL Control Center    Table6 Troubleshooting Guidefor Running PCC continued       Troubleshooting Condition    Discussion       You receive the error  SWT no more handles   when trying to run PCC as root or as user  psql     You are not required to log in as user psql or root to run PCC  However  if  you are neither of these users  you must be a member of group pvsw     The  SWT no more handles  error is caused by X Server denying a  connection to a client  Before switching to user psql or root  open a  console window and type xhost   to allow other clie
101. ables  or  at the database level   for all tables at once  See Exporting a Schema           Function Executor Windows Executes Btrieve operations  enabling you to learn how the MicroKernel  Engine works or test and debug an application  Testing Btrieve Operations  in Advanced Operations Guide    Gateway Locator Windows Used to configure and maintain gateway locator files for the Workgroup    engine  See Setting Up a Gateway Configuration in Getting Started With  PSQL        Import and Export Data    Windows and Linux    Imports data into or exports data from a table  See Importing Data with  Import Data Wizard and Exporting Data with Export Data Wizard        License Administrator    Windows and Linux    Manages PSQL license keys  See License Administration        Maintenance    Windows and Linux    Performs common PSQL file and data manipulations  such as importing  and exporting data  BUTIL is the command line version  See Manipulating  Btrieve Data Files with Maintenance in Advanced Operations Guide        Monitor    Windows and Linux    Monitors server engine activity  Useful for database administration and  programming diagnostics  See Monitoring in Advanced Operations Guide        Notification Viewer    ODBC Administrator    PSQL Control Center          Windows and Linux    Windows    Windows and Linux       Displays messages logged by the licensing components  Notification  Viewer provides two interfaces  system tray icons and a graphical user  interface  GUI   See Not
102. acity Usage Viewer ziriaren i ai titted A og sd 59   MONO coa tices ues Se Bt ap deri iS rE Goh tig Bgl ee asus a aks Gee a S 60   Defragmenter  o oe s aoa a i e a eee 61   Databases     Ait hota te tnt Dra ld ld eet thee ed ws 62  Database Properties  3 it AA RE OR Pee e E 62   New Database GUI Reference    2  ee 66   Creating  M odifying  Deleting  and Repairing PSQL Databases              cee ee 68   MAD C55  ce Fh A eaten EN Aches toby Math aS ha ete A 72  DataTable ee de Bie a a ed Ao eed ela wean ea a a ela as 72  System  ADIOS sis a aos gra e ar E Bra a ley as RATE aly Sy a wee 72  Table Properties     ee 72   Creating  Importing  and Exporting Data    o a aaa es 75  Creating Data Through POC i airia aned a a aN a e A a aS A E 75  Importing Data with Bulk Data Utility      a a aaa ees 75  Importing Data with Import Data Wizard    aoaaa ooo    e        75  Exporting Data with Export Data Wizard    aoaaa es 75   Metadata aia oo ten ua ee aay Ae eu nts te i eRe a dico 77  IN DICTIONARY Clause    a 77  USSIIN Gi  C1 AU ee Ge sea atten ge eh jects e Dade tte Se iso tee I ae aud tated 77  Plain Statement ioei o i a i a ee a d 78  Exporting a Schema  sites  eae a a Ae eee dae i a eed ee ea 78   Triggers  Stored Procedures  User defined Functions  and VieWS     a aaa 80   Groups  Users  and Security    aooaa 81  Security Tak Sica a deta te Sa als 81    Configuration  acc Ae SY A A dd t 89    Contents    Dialogs for File Open and File Save       aaa ee 90  Wide Character Data S
103. actional Engine Started Automatic  Bs Plug and Play Manages d    Started Automatic  a Print Spooler Loads files    Started Automatic  Sy Protected Storage Provides pr    Started Automatic  Sa QoS RSVP Provides n    Manual  Sy Remote Access Auto Connection Ma    Creates a    Manual  Sy Remote Access Connection Manager Creates a    Manual    Sa Remote Procedure Call  RPC  Provides th    Started Automatic                                  2 Right click PSQL Relational Engine and select Stop  Right click PSQL Transactional Engine and    select Stop      gt  To start the database services on a Windows server by using Net Start or PSC    1 Run oneof the following commands at the operating system       net start  Pervasive SQL   lt transactional   relational gt            psc start  Pervasive SQL   lt transactional   relational gt       17    Using PSQL     gt  To stop the database services on a Windows server by using Net Stop or PSC  1 Run oneof the following commands at the operating system       net stop  Pervasive SQL   lt transactional   relational gt            psc stop  Pervasive SQL   lt transactional   relational gt       Starting and Stopping the Workgroup Engine on Windows     gt  To start the Workgroup Engine as an application on Windows    These steps assume that the Workgroup Engine was installed as an application  See Installing the PSQL  Workgroup for Windows in Getting Started With PSQL     1 Click Start Workgroup Engine from the operating system Start menu or Apps 
104. airing PSQL Databases     Tables     Creating  Importing  and Exporting Data   m Triggers  Stored Procedures  User defined Functions  and Views     Groups  Users  and Security     Configuration   a Dialogs for File Open and File Save   a WideCharacter Data Support for Import Data  Export Data  and Export Schema    43    Using PSQL Control Center       An Overview of PSQL Control Center    PSQL Control Center  PCC  is an integrated framework in which users can connect to PSQL engines   set up and modify databases and tables  query and update data  tune engine performance  and access the  PSQL documentation library     PCC uses a file explorer like motif    a tree of objects    referred to as the PSQL Explorer  This tree of  objects can be opened or expanded to reveal more detail  Examples of objects include engines  databases   tables  and users  The following figures illustrate PCC with several window views displayed  The PSQL  Explorer is the tree view on the left     Figure17 PSQL Control Center on Windows Platforms    File Edit Tools SQL Window Help    BReRaReeF Sl Sle    Ta PSQL     O Billing 23   A    BE Outline 23  a  a  a PSQL a select   from    Billing    a     Es  Billing   amp  Local Client   select   from  Billing   4  amp  Services      33 PSQL Relational Engine    83 PSQL Transactional Engine  a cl Engines  a  El vm win7 ent 64  anonymous    a of Databases     DEFAULTDB q  a   DEMODATA  Master         a    Tables                                              Billi
105. al  database name        A database under Databases  node       To repair a database name  and associate copied tables  with a new database          49    Using PSQL Control Center    Table8 Right click Tasks for Objects in PSQL Explorer                                        50       node or  a group    Working with Task Right click For information  see  Schemas  Export database schema A database under Databases   To exportall table schemas at  Tables node once  Export table schema A table under Tables node To export a table schema for  a particular table  Add table A database under Databases   To start Table Editor fora new   performs a SELECT   from   node  or table  table name query  a table under Tables node  Open table A table under Tables node To open a table  Edit table A table under Tables node To start Table Editor for an  existing table  Import table A table under Tables node To import data into a  database table  Export table A table under Tables node To export data from a  database table  Delete table A table under Tables node To delete a table  Users  Add user A database under Databases   To create a new user using  Groups node or PSQL Explorer  a user  To assign a user to a group  using PSQL Explorer  Add group A database under Databases   To create a new group using    PSQL Explorer          Delete user or group       A user or group       To delete a group or user  using PSQL Explorer       Table8 Right click Tasks for Objects in PSQL Explorer    An Overview 
106. al  information     Table 14 Description of Common SQL Objects in PCC          Object Description Related Information  Triggers A type of stored procedure that are automatically executed when   CREATE TRIGGER in SQL Engine  data in a table is modified with an INSERT  UPDATE  or Reference  DELETE   Common SQL Object Tasks  Stored A collection of one or more SQL statements that can take and CREATE PROCEDURE in SQL Engine  procedures return user supplied parameters  Reference    Common SQL Object Tasks       User defined   A scalar routine that returns a value  CREATE FUNCTION in SQL Engine  functions Reference    Common SQL Object Tasks       Views A database object that stores a query and behaves like a table    CREATE VIEW in SQL Engine Reference                Common SQL Object Tasks       155    SQL Editor       SQL Editor Used in SQL View Tab of Table Editor  SQL Editor is also used in the SQL View Page of Table Editor  See SQL View Page     156    SQL Editor Tasks       SQL Editor Tasks    This section explains the tasks that you perform with SQL Editor  The tasks are divided into the  following categories                 Category Description   General Tasks Orient you to the overall use of SQL Editor   Execution Tasks Apply to the running of SQL statements   Grid Tasks Apply to using the Grid   Text View Tasks Apply to using the Text window   Outline View Tasks Apply to using the Outline window   Common SQL Object Tasks Apply to triggers  stored procedures  user defined 
107. ample  if you seetwo PSQL components both marked with the same version  you may want  to check which is loaded in memory and that the components are located where you expect     6 Click Next   7 Click Finish if you are finished using PSA  or click View Log File to view the log     Test Active Installation Tasks     gt  To test your network  1 Start PSA and click Next   2 Onthe Options dialog  click Test active installation  if it is not already selected      175    PSQL System Analyzer  PSA     176    Click Test network communication  if it is not already selected    Click Next     For Target machine  type the machine nameor TCP IP address of the machine you wish to test  You  may also type    localhost    for the local machine  The machine can be the machine where you are  currently located or aremote machine     If you want to control how the tests are run  click Advanced Settings and complete the following  steps     a  By default  PSA usesthefirst available protocol  You can force PSA to useoneor more protocols  by clicking Use Only These Protocols     b  Select the protocol options that you want PSA to test  Note that the NetBIOS protocol is not  supported on PSQL Server  The SPX protocol is not supported on PSQL Workgroup     c  Specify the number of stress test messages to send by typing a value for test messages  The  default is 75   After successfully connecting using any protocol  PSA sends stress test messages  to ensure that the connectivity is functioning correct
108. an  also add users and groups with PCC  See Users and Groups in Advanced Operations Guide     If security is not important to you  you can avoid creating many users and assigning privileges by  granting access to PUBLIC  which means anyone on your network can access the data  You can use this  statement     GRANT ALL ON my table    ownername    TO PUBLIC    Is there a client side requester for the Relational Engine    Thereis no DOS requester support for SQL applications  but the PSQL Client software for Windows  includes ODBC client components allowing you to connect to aremote server engine    Is ODBC the only method of access for PSQL     Definitely not  In addition to ODBC and the time tested Btrieve API  you can also develop applications  using our OLE DB provider  our JDBC driver  our pureJava interface  or our ActiveX controls     236    Frequently Asked Questions    Is there a single database file housing all the data  data definitions  stored procedures  security   table relationships  and so on as in some other products     No  PSQL stores datain separatefiles  onefile per relational table definition  The meta data  such as data  definitions  user group definitions  and so on  arestored in a set of DDF files  where each fileendsin the  extension     ddf        Does the Relational Engine have scheduler capabilities to run stored procedures or other types  of scripts designed to access and affect data     The Relational Engine does not have a scheduler     Upgrading f
109. anced  Operations Guide                       180       CLI Utilities Overview                                           Utility Description GUI Available Windows Linux  Server   Client   Server   Client  btadmin Creates and administers database No No No Yes No  user names and passwords  butil Repairs and manipulates data files Maintenance Utility  see Yes Yes Yes Yes  Manipulating Btrieve Data  Files with Maintenance in  Advanced Operations  Guide   clilcadm Applies and administers user licenses    License Administrator  see   Yes No Yes No  License Administration   w64clilcadm   Windows 64   bit   clilcadm64   Linux 64 bit   clipaadm Phone Authorization Utility used to PSQL Phone Authorization   Yes Yes Yes Yes  i authorize product keys when internet   Wizard  w64clipaadm   connection is unavailable    Windows 64   bit   Phone Authorization Only   clipaadm64   Linux 64 bit   dbmaint Creates and administers named No No No Yes No  databases  dsnadd Creates and administers Engine DSNs   No No No Yes Yes  on the server  isql Allows you to run SQL statements No No No Yes Yes  interactively and test connectivity to a  isql64  Linux DSN   64 bit   licgetauth Transmits Authorization Request Data   No Yes Yes Yes Yes  and retrieves Authorization Key Data   w64licgetauth   Windows 64     Offline Authorization Only   bit   licgetauth64   Linux 64 bit   Notification Notification Viewer provides two Yes Yes No Yes No  Viewer interfaces  system tray icons and a  graphical user interface 
110. ank truncation is applicable only if the Variable Records statistic  is Yes and Data Compression is set to No        Record Compression    Shows whether record compression is enabled  If it is  the MicroKernel compresses each  record it inserts into the data file  See Record and Page Compression in Advanced  Operations Guide        Key Only File    Shows the name of the key only file for the table  if any  A key only file contains no data  records but serves as an index to other Btrieve files        Index Balancing    Shows whether balanced indexing is enabled        FreeSpace Threshold    Shows a percentage  5   10   20  or 30   if the data file has a free space threshold   The database engine stores the variable length portions of records on their own pages   called variable pages   separate from the fixed length portions  which are stored on data  pages      The database engine uses the threshold to determine whether to add data to an existing  variable page or to create a new one  A higher free space threshold reduces fragmentation  of variable length records across several pages but uses more disk space        Uses Alternate Collating  Sequence    Shows whether the table uses an alternate collating sequence for sorting        System Data Key    Shows whether the data file has system data keys enabled        Page Compression          Shows whether page compression is enabled  See Record and Page Compression in  Advanced Operations Guide            gt  To view properties o
111. any temporary licenses that  have not expired         gt  To Determine the Data In Use Limit    1    2    Ensure that the server name in the title bar is the server for which you want to determine a data in  use limit  If not  select a different server as described in To Select a Server for LicenseAdministration     For a particular product  total the data in use values that appear in the License Information list in  the    Data In Use GB    column  Exclude any values for expired temporary licenses     For example  total all values for the permanent license  all data in use increases  and any temporary  licenses that have not expired  The sum is the maximum permitted amount in gigabytes for al   concurrently open data files for that particular product        Note An easier way to determinethe data in use limit is with M onitor  See Monitoring Resource  Usage in Advanced O perations Guide  The    M aximum    value for Data in Use MB is the data in use  limit for the permanent license  all data in useincreaselicenses  and any temporary licenses that have  not expired     Be awarethat License Administrator uses gigabytes  GB  as the units because that is how data in use  is associated with a key  Monitor uses megabytes  M B  as the units for resource usage and kilobytes   KB  for the size of an individual file  The different contexts require units appropriate for each  context         gt  To Refresh the License Information List    1    Ensure that the server name in the title ba
112. apacity requirements  select a time period that includes maximum and minimum  licensing requirements  For example  if your business has quarterly cycles  include at least 90 days worth  of data  By reviewing data usage usage over time  you can ensure that the license capacity meets or  exceeds your peak usage requirements     Refer to Capacity Usage Viewer for detailed information about how to access and use Capacity Usage  Viewer        Note Monitor can also help you estimate session count and data in use  See M onitor in this guide  and M onitoring in Advanced Operations Guide        Behavior When Data Use Limit ls Reached  The following summarizes the expected behaviors when the limits are reached for data in use     m Thedatabase engine denies requests for new file opens and returns status code 161 to the  application   Status code 161 is returned if the file to be opened exceeds 110  of the datain use  limit  A slight buffer above 100  is provided because an increase in data in use can also result from  the growth of currently open data files        Subsequent opensto an already open data file are permitted  That is  if a fileis already open and data  in use reaches or exceeds its limit  other users can still access the open file     m Notethat datain use also increases if an open file increases in size  Operations on an already open  file continue to be permitted even if the size of the open file increases beyond the data in use limit     99    License Administration   
113. aphical User Interface  m License Administrator Command Line Interface  a License Administration Tasks    97    License Administration       License Administration Concepts    This section discusses the following topics     a LicenseModels  a License Enforcement    Message Logging    License Models    ThePSQL products use different license models  The concurrent user mode  limits the user count and  the capacity based model places limits on the data in use  The license model used is dependent on the  product     Concurrent User License Model    With the concurrent user license model  each product key specifies a licensed user count  A user count  allows the specified number of concurrent connections to the PSQL database engine  Users are counted  by network address  The IP address is used for TCP IP  the IPX address is used for SPX IPX     Each computer that accesses PSQ L asa client session counts as oneuser  M ultipleapplicationson asingle  client computer are counted as one user  not separate users  Internally  PSQL assigns each machine a  serial number and all connections with the same serial number are recognized as coming from the same  machine  A machinewith multiple NICs  for example  isrecognized asthe same machine  Each Terminal  Server session also counts as one user     Collectively  all applications that access the database engine  usethe same network protocol and address   and run on the same machine as the database engine count as one user     A user is counted
114. arameter   file  rbldcli  command file    Options    For a complete discussion of the rebuild utility  see Command Line Parameters in Advanced O perations  Guide     See Also  Advanced O perations Guide for more information about the Rebuild utility     219    Command Line Interface Utilities    220    Basic Troubleshooting       How to Identify and Solve Common Problems       chapter             This chapter provides information for troubleshooting and resolving the most commonly  encountered    problems      General Troubleshooting     Error Messages from PCC     Frequently Asked Questions    221    Basic Troubleshooting       General Troubleshooting    This section provides some basic troubleshooting procedures to help you rule out possible causes for  situations you may encounter  This section covers the following topics     a   get Error 1114 when trying to access my data   m   getan error about ServerDSN or DBQ was not found in the connection string       get a message about Engine components version is different than my client components    version      can   t get to my data on the server engine       PCC runsslowly or hangs when retrieving large record sets      get Error 1114 when trying to access my data  or      get an error about ServerDSN or DBQ was not found in the connection string    PCC can access remote server data sources  DSN s  using connections without client DSNs  M any  desktop applications  such as M icrosoft Excel and M icrosoft Access  cannot do th
115. as not changed  To confirm the change  open the X  File system table and  look at the Xf Loc field for the given user table  If you cannot see the system tables in PCC  expand  System O bjects    You can also usethe ALTER TABLE USING statementin SQL to changethe data file used by a particular  table  Refer to SQL Engine Reference for further information     What is the best way to ensure that my data dictionaries  DDFs  are safe     Always keep a backup copy of your DDFs  Anytime you make changes to the runtime DDFs  be sure to  make a backup copy of the DDFs before making changes  If you areturning on database security for the  first time  you should make a backup copy of the dictionaries without security  and a backup copy with  security     How can I tell whether I have non standard DDFs     If you can edit your DDFswith a Btrieve utility  it means that you do not have standard dictionary files   A standard dictionary file does not permit direct Btrieve access  This lock out is a safety feature that  ensures only the Relational Engine can write to the dictionary  DDFs are very special files that must  remain synchronized with each other and with the data files at all times     Standard dictionaries do not have case sensitive table names or field names  That is  the column  definitions for column Xf Namein file ddf and column Xe Name in field ddf have the Case flag set   meaning the values are case insensitive     DDFsare Btrieve files and thus can be opened and viewed  not
116. as only  remote internet access  you can authorize remotely     Ya       Tip See To Authorize a Key for information on online authorization         gt  To Authorize a Key Remotely    Note that the GUI License Administrator can also be used for remote authorization if you connect to a  remote database engine     1 Atacommand prompt  enter the following command   clilcadm  a key    lt server   s gt  servername    lt username   u gt  username    lt password   p gt  password  If the machine where PSQL isinstalled does not have internet access  offline authorization is available      gt  To Deauthorize a Key Remotely  1 Atacommand prompt  enter the following command   clilcadm  d key   lt server   s gt  servername    lt username   u gt  username    lt password   p gt  password    Va       Tip When you deauthorize a product key  all increase keys  user count  session count  or data in use   associated with that product key are automatically deauthorized as well         gt  To Authorize a Key Offline    Only consider offline authorization if the machine on which you are running PSQL does not have  internet access  Offline authorization is completed in three phases using two machines  M achine A does  not have connectivity and machine B does have Internet connectivity  In this example machine A is the  machine that needs to authorize the PSQL product key     Phase 1   Generate Authorization Request Data  1 AtmachineA  without Internet connectivity   enter the following at a command p
117. ation assumes you are familiar with the basics of using a computer  such as clicking  and dragging  opening and saving files  If you need assistance with these tasks  please consult the  documentation that came with your computer and or operating system     The viewer for the user documentation is integrated into PSQL Control Center  PCC   Access the  documentation through the PCC interface on the Welcome view  in the Help menu  by pressing F1   Windows  or Shift F1  Linux      Thefollowing is a summary of the most commonly used books in the documentation library  The  library contains other books  all of which can be accessed through the PCC interface as explained above     Getting Started    Getting Started with PSQL helps you get PSQL running with installation  setup  and troubleshooting  information  Getting Started With PSQL covers the following topics      Preparing to install PSQL v12   a   Installing PSQL v12    m Upgrading from previous versions of PSQL or Btrieve   a Configuring PSQL v12     Troubleshooting your PSQL v12 installation    What   s New    What s New in PSQL provides an overview of the new features and changed behavior for the current  release of PSQL relative to the most recent previous release  This book provides summary information  on new features and directs you to the locations in the documentation where the new features are fully  discussed     12    Using PSQL Documentation    User   s Guide    PSQL User s Guideintroduces PSQL and describes comm
118. bc org  For further  information on this project  contact its current maintainer  Nick Gorham  nick easysoft com     A copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License  LGPL  isincluded on the distribution media for this  product  You may also view the LGPL at www  fsf org licensing licenses Igpl html     User   s Guide  December 2014    Contents    Contents    About This Manual                     o xi  Who Should Read This Manual            o    ooo    xii  CONVENTIONS ani are e a a ir aac Go ti oS OE eek ik ws wa eed Sah ok Bah oe xiii   1 Introducing PSQL ici a RA EA 1  Understanding PSQL and its Capabilities  Understanding the PSQL Database Management System             o ooo    oo       2   WihatiS a Database     ca stats do a l   a da ta A hs we ta IES oe 2  What is a Database Management System     2    o    o    3  Components of PSOL aur tine s airia A a E Lee 3  Key Concepts    e a ee Re a ee a 6  Basic Database Structures and Terms   aoaaa a 6  Unique Benefits of PSOL  su oae e A Wo Fd a a Ea i a a 9  Understanding the DBM S Products           oo    oo    10  PSOL Workgroup ay os 2 i eai n aw ara bed be dae Pha oe E ed 10  PSOE SIVE diet a acid nod Spon th iste see e Oe  TEA ee Bonne Mave SEE 4 10  PSOE VAS fcr are ra Lacan ee tes at so a a aad ware ee ale aid 10  Crystal ReportsforPSQL  aoaaa ooo    11  UsingPSQL Documentation    0    ee 12  Getting Started ind An sean aed ads Macey an a tha Phd  Ad es 12  What SNC ia std a awe St Sten a gen ie a e ane ees 12  Users G
119. complete set of online documentation  For more information about the  documentation  see Using PSQL Documentation     Introducing PSQL       Key Concepts   This section explains some basic concepts of databases and some of the key concepts that distinguish  PSQL from other database products    Basic Database Structures and Terms    M ost database management systems in use today share a common set of basic structures  This section  briefly explains those structures  The descriptions that follow refer to the diagram below     Table2 ExampleTable for Telephone Directory       Phone Book    Table             Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Column 4  Col Names Name Address Zip Phone  Row 1 Fred Black 643 Oak 12346 555 2345  Row 2 Jane Doe 112 Elm 12345 555 1212  Row 3 John Doe 112 Elm 12345 555 1212    Value    The most basic element of a database is a value A valueis one piece of data  one characteristic  for a  specific entity  For example  in the diagram  the name    John Doe    or the phone number    555 1212    is  a value     Column or Field    Another element is a column  or afield  A column represents a characteristic with no specific value   Columns generally have names that describe the given characteristic  For example  in thetelephone  book  Name and Phone are columns  They do not have specific values unless you look up a particular  person  Field is sometimes used to refer to the generic characteristic of a specific row  For example   someone might point to a specific box 
120. count  A user count allows the  specified number of computers to connect to the PSQL database engine concurrently  PSQL identifies    232    Frequently Asked Questions    machines by serial number  so all connections with the same serial number are recognized as coming  from thesamemachine  A machine with multiple N ICs  for example  isrecognized as the same machine     Each workstation that accesses PSQL as a client session counts as one user  Multiple applications on a  single client computer are counted as one user  not separate users  Each Terminal Server session also  counts as one user     PSQL uses one user count for each unique incoming protocol from the same client computer session  If  one application uses TCP IP and another application uses SPX  two licenses are counted if both  applications run on the same machine  If different address formats of the same protocol are used  only  one user is counted  For example  if one application uses  Pv4 and another uses  Pv6  only one user is  counted if both applications run on the same machine  IPv4 and IP v6 arejust different address formats  of the TCP IP     Only oneengineis ever permitted to access data files at a time  The second engineto try to open thefiles  gets locked out  because the engines open the data files in exclusive mode  non file sharing  so that  corruption cannot occur     Does the Workgroup engine use concurrent or per seat licensing     Concurrent  Refer to Concurrent User License M odel      am think
121. ct and select  configuration properties Properties  System Register a server to work with   The PSQL node To register a remote server  a remote database engine engine   The local engine is You can right click any object  automatically registered to subordinate to the PSQL root  PCC when you install PSQL  to work with a remote engine  Work with PSQL services on   The Services node  if To start or stop services  Windows machines applicable to the installation   To set services startup policy  Log in out  database engine    A database engine under To log in to a database engine  Engines node  To log out from a database  engine  Monitor concurrent sessions   A database engine under To access Capacity Usage  and data usage Engines node Viewer in Advanced  Operations Guide  Monitor certain activities and   A database engine under To access Monitor for a  attributes Engines node database engine in  Advanced Operations Guide  Delete a remote database A database engine under To delete a remote database  engine Engines node engine  Databases Create The Databases node To create a new database  This task can also be  performed from any object  subordinate to the Engines  node  Delete A database under Databases   To delete a database    node       Log in out  database     A database under Databases  node    To log out from and log in toa  database    See also Groups  Users  and  Security          Associate table s  with a new  database    repair database name in  tables bound to an origin
122. d copy text from Text view  Perform one of the following actions        Pressand hold down the left mouse button and drag the cursor across thetext you want to select          Right click within the Text view then click Select All     Right click then click Copy     Outline View Tasks    See also To run SQL statements in Outline view      gt  To minimize  maximize  or restore Outline view size    1    Click the desired sizing button     Button   Sizing Action    E       Minimizes the Outline window       Maximizes the Outline window       Restores the Outline window to its size before it was minimized             Common SQL Objects Tasks  Common SQL objects include triggers  stored procedures  user defined functions  and views      gt     1    To create a common SQL object    In PCC PSQL Explorer  expand the Engines node and the registered server nodes to display the  available databases     Right click on the database for which you want the common SQL object to apply  or right click on  any of the database s subordinate nodes      Click New then one of the following depending on the object that you want to create       Function     Stored procedure    Trigger     View    167    SQL    4    5     gt     1    2    3     gt     1    2    3    168    Editor    A new SQL Editor is opened that contains a default name for the object on atab  Thenameisin the  form object_n  where object is the name of the object and n is an integer that starts with oneand  increments by one  For exa
123. ding a database prevents the   Interactions Between  DDFs or data files from being used in another database and prevents a data file   Btrieve and Relational  from having two or more different table definitions within the same database  Constraints  For more information about bound databases  refer to Bound Database versus    E  back to Figure 20   Integrity Enforced   Create Specifies whether you want data dictionary files  DDF  created with the database    Dictionary Location  dictionary Dictionary files are required for relational  SQL  access to your data   files  if the i  do ds i  By default  the dictionary files and data files are created in the same location  You  back to Figure 20   may specify different locations for these types of files after you create the  database   Typically  the only situation for which you would choose not to create DDF files is  when you have an unnamed legacy database for which DDFs already exist  and  you are now creating a database name for that database  Under these  circumstances  the database engine links the new database name with the pre   existing DDFs        Table 10 CreateNew Database GUI Elements    New Database GU  Reference                Element Description Related Material  Relational Specifies whether integrity constraints  security  RI  and triggers  are enforced on   Setting Up Referential  integrity the database  These constraints apply to Btrieve access to the data files as well   Integrity  enforced as ODBC SQL access  
124. does not contain a preview of the literal data  Rather  it shows an example of what the exported data  looks like given the file name  encoding  and the selected options     Write column names in first row     and Delimiter   The Example inset is updated when a file is chosen and encoding or the options are  changed     93    Using PSQL Control Center    For example  in the following image  the dialog is set to export the data for the    Course    table provided  with the DEM ODATA sample database  The option    Write column names in first row    is selected and  that Delimiter is set to    COLON     The Example inset shows this        Export Data   Course q     Enter file name and provide information about the export data  Export To    C  users public export_course sq  Browse     SQL Query Statement     SELECT   FROM    Course        Y  Write column names in first row  Delimiter   COLON  gt      Encoding   windows 1252 mn    Change default encoding  Example    ColumniName     Column2Name             ColumniRowlData   Column2RowlData           Column1Row2Data   Column2Row2Data            Note that the export action trims trailing spaces from the values of the CHAR and NCHAR data types   You can access the standard operating system dialog for file selection by clicking Browse     See also Exporting Data with Export Data Wizard in PSQL User s Guide     Export Schema Dialog    Export Schema now allows you to change file encoding and to set a default encoding  Note that the  Exam
125. dvanced connection attributes  click Advanced and make your selections in the dialog  box that appears     Figure6 Advanced Connection Attributes for Client DSNs    Network  v  Enable Array Fetch  Array Fetch Buffer 8 KB    TCP IP Port Number    1583    v  Default    Encoding Translation     None OEM ANSI Conversion    Automatic    See Advanced Connection Attributesin ODBC Guidefor details about the attributes  Do not modify  the Network or TCP IP Port Number attributes unless you first review the information for them     32    Setting up Database Access with PCC    Click OK to accept the attribute selections and to return to the ODBC interface dialog   9 Click OK   10 You can now set up another DSN or exit the ODBC Administrator     Setting Up a Client DSN on a Linux Client  Use the dsnadd utility  See dsnadd     33    Using PSQL       Accessing Data on a Remote Engine Using PCC    You can use PSQL Control Center to access data on a remote machine on which aPSQL v12 engineis  installed     a     gt        Tip You will need to log in as an administrative user on the remote engineto perform most  functions  This means that you must have full administrator level rights on the remote server or be  a member of the Pervasive Admin group defined on the remote machine         gt  To access data on a remote PSQL engine    1 InthePSQL Control Center  double click the remote PSQL Engines node  then double click  Databases     Figure7 Expanding the Databases List for an Engine          
126. e        clrowner sourceFile  O lt owner     gt    UIDuname  PWDpword   DBdbname       commandFile  commandOutputFile     copy sourceFile outputFile    O lt  ownel     gt    O lt owne2     gt      UlDuname  PWDpword   DBdbname      create outputFile descriptionFile   lt  Y   N  gt     UIDuname  PWDpword   DBdbname      drop sourceFile  lt  keyNumber   SYSKEY  gt     O lt owner     gt     UIDuname  PWDpword   DBdbname       endbu  lt   A   sourceFile    listFile  gt    UIDuname  PWDpword   DBdbname       index sourceFile indexFile descriptionFile    o lt owne     gt     UlDuname  PWDpword   DBdbname       load unformattedFile outputFile   O lt owner    gt     UIDuname  PWDpword   DBdbname      recover sourceFile unformattedFile   O lt owner    gt     UIDuname  PWDpword   DBdbname      rollfwd  lt sourceFile   volume   drive    listFile gt     lt  L dumpFile     wr dumpFile  gt    T lt dataLength gt      E lt keyLength gt     H    V    O lt ownerList   owne gt           A    UlDuname  PWDpword   DBdbname       save sourceFile unformattedFile  Y indexFile   N  lt keyNumber  1 gt     O lt ownerl     gt     O lt owner2     gt      UIDuname  PWDpword   DBdbname       setowner sourceFile  O lt owner     gt  level   UlDuname  PWDpword   DBdbname       sindex sourceFile  lt descriptionFile   SYSKEY gt   keyNumber    O lt owne     gt     UIDuname  PWDpword   DBdbname      startbu  lt sourceFile    listFile gt    UIDuname  PWDpword   DBdbname      stat  lt sourceFile gt    O lt owne    
127. e     SQL Editor also supports the use of a start end comment block that can span multiple lines           4 Click at the beginning of the line where you want a comment   2 Type         or          followed by your comment text    Thefollowing example shows valid comments        SELECT   FROM tl                 This is a valid comment       and so is this       SELECT   FROM t2     This is valid after the   sign       The following example shows multi line comments                    SELECT   FROM tl     single line comment          This is a comment block that spans two lines     161    SQL    Editor    Statements inside this block are ignored          SELECT   FROM t2              To cancel  undo  or restore  redo  typing actions in SQL Editor  Perform one of the following actions      Click Edit  gt  Undo  or press Ctrl Z  to cancel typing actions      Click Edit  gt  Redo  or press Ctrl Y  to restore typing actions    To find text or replace text in SQL Editor   Click Edit  gt  Find Replace  or press Ctrl F     A dialog appears on which you specify a text string to find or replace     To select text in SQL Editor  Perform one of the following actions       Click Edit  gt  Select All to select all of the contents of SQL Editor      Pressand hold down the left mouse button and drag the cursor across thetext you want to select     To perform basic editing functions in SQL Editor  Click Edit then click the function you want  cut  copy  paste  and so forth     Statement Execut
128. e  In fact  PSQL allows  applications to use both engines at the same time to access the same data     Engine Access Methods    PSQL provides a variety of methods to access data through the engines  such as the Btrieve API   ADO NET  and ODBC  Refer to the SDK documentation for all of the access methods     Terminology Revisited    When the product and the documentation refer to the M icroKernel Engine  thetermstable and database  are generally not used  and data files are referred to directly as such  In addition  MicroKernel Engine  users normally use the terms records and fields rather than rows and columns     Introducing PSQL       Understanding the DBMS Products    PSQL is available in different versions  The major differences between the versions are price  multiuser  features  and the licensing model  used         PSQL Workgroup is the least expensive  but it provides support only for small workgroup  environments     m PSQL Server is designed for maximum scalability in high volume  mission critical database  applications where there is a dedicated database server  The Server engine quickly becomes most  economical as you increase the number of users       PSQL Vx Server engine has the same capabilities as PSQL Server  and its license model is designed  to support service bureau  software as a  service  or other multiplexed environments     The database engine in all of the versions is fully compatible with any PSQL database  and was designed  with a common architectu
129. e  M aster user password  as with all PSQL passwords  is case sensitive   y  Caution If you turn on security  besureto specify a password with a significant length  Do not leave  the password field blank because doing so creates a major security risk for your database           See PSQL Security chapter in Advanced O perations Guidefor additional information about security     Security Tasks    This section contains step by step tasks pertaining to security  The tasks are divided into the following  categories     Category Description       General Tasks Orient you to the overall use of security   To log out from and log in to a database  To turn on security using PSQL Explorer  To turn on security using SQL   To turn off security using PSQL Explorer  To turn off security using SQL       Btrieve Security Policy Apply to security policies for the MicroKernel Engine  Tasks To set or change the security policy for a database    To use an existing database  including the pre defined DefaultDB  with your PSQL files       User and Group Tasks Apply to creating users and groups   To create a new group using PSQL Explorer   To create a new user using PSQL Explorer   To assign a user to a group using PSQL Explorer  To delete a group or user using PSQL Explorer  To work with groups and users using SQL             81    Using PSQL Control Center       Category Description  Assigning Permissions Apply to assigning permissions to users and groups  Tasks    To assign permissions for a grou
130. e  database engine  If you choose  you may use a client requester that is an older version than the  database engine with which it interacts  In some situations  depending on the typeof SDK access  method used by your application  an older version requester will not work with thedatabase engine   Your application will be unable to communicate with the database engine  For those situations  you  must use client requesters that are the same version as the database engine     Client requesters that are a newer version than the database engine may or may not function  correctly  Actian Corporation does not guarantee that newer versions of client requesters will  function correctly with older versions of the engine  Therefore  Actian Corporation recommends  that you avoid the use of newer version client requesters with an older engine        222    General Troubleshooting    I can   t get to my data on the server engine    If you cannot get to data on the server engine  your most likely causes are     The server computer is down or the network has been interrupted    You do not have operating system rights to access the server  or you are not logged into the correct  network    Theclient requester is not enabled   The database server engineis not installed or not running   The database server is not accepting remote connections   The remote database does not have a DSN set up to advertise on the network  Thelocal client does not have a DSN to access the server   The client or serv
131. e Index Segment Details displays and lists the selected Index Segments   Click in the first empty Columns cell  then open the Columns list  click  f      Index Editor  Indexes Index Segment Details    Emyindex Add       Ounique O Partial  Normal    v  Allow Modifications                Columns SortOrder  Building_Name Ascending  Number Ascending          From thelist  click the desired column for the segment     141    Table Editor       Note Somedata types  such as LON GVARBINARY  cannot be used for an index  Columns with such  data types are not valid choices        Thedefault sort order is Ascending  If you need a descending sort order  select Descending from the  Sort Order list for the Column you want changed     5 Continueselecting columns from the list until all the segments are added     Note that a column can be selected for an index only once  Once selected  the column is removed  from thelist of choices because the column has already been designated in the index     6 Click File  gt  Save or  El before changing pages within Table Editor      gt  To modify an index segment    For detailed information about segments  see Segmentation in the PSQL Programmer s Guide  which is  part of the PSQL Software Developer s Kit  SDK      Only the database engine can add an index to an IDENTITY or aSMALLIDENTITY column  However   you can includean IDENTITY or aSMALLIDENTITY column as part of amultiple segment index  See  also AUTOINC in SQL Engine Reference     1 Ensurethat the  
132. e Set locale to locname    mn Limit column display width to n characters    v Display verbose explanations for errors and warnings       version Display version of unixODBC in use      W Wrap results in an HTML table    x0xHH Delimit columns with HH  where x is in hex  For example  0x09 is the tab character   Commands    Once you arein interactive mode  the following commands may be used     sql statement A valid SQL statement to execute against the database to which isql or isql64 is connected     help  tablename  Display column information  The output is the same as for the dbo fSQLColumns catalog  function  See dbo fSQLColumns in SQL Engine Reference     If tablename is omitted  the output is for all tables in the database  including system tables     quit Exits interactive mode     Notes    By default  isq  and isql64 display prompt information when in interactive mode  such as    Connected          sql statement        help  tablename      and    quit      For redirection and piping of output to afile  you may  not want the prompt information  The b option suppresses the output of the prompt information     Isql and isql64 support redirection and piping for input and output  In addition  both utilities can  process a file containing multiple SQL statements  Each statement must end with a carriage return line  feed  The last line of the file must be a blank line  See Examples     Examples    The following example connects to an unsecured database named    acctspay    that
133. e dialog box that opens  confirm that this is a genuine copy of the software product  When the  repair is done  a completion message is displayed   To Display License Information    Ensure that the server name in the title bar is the server for which you want to administer database  licenses  If not  select a different server as described in To Select a Server for License Administration     View the information for the authorized licenses in the License Information list        Note You must first authorize a key to display information about the associated license  such as user  count  session count  data in use  license type  expiration date and so forth  Once authorized  if the  license is not what you want  you may deauthorize it provided the license it is not a temporary  license  Temporary licenses expire on their own and cannot be deauthorized     See To Authorize a Key and To Deauthorize a Key        To Determine a Total User Count    Ensure that the server name in the title bar is the server for which you want determine a database  user count  If not  select a different server as described in To Select a Server for License  Administration     For a particular product  total the user count values that appear in the License Information list in  the    User Count    column  Exclude any values for expired temporary licenses     For example  total all values for the PSQL Server product for the permanent license  all user count  increases  and any temporary licenses that hav
134. e list for which you want to create a group or user    4 Click OK     5 In SQL Editor  issuethe SQL statement SET SECURITY      password    where password is the text  string you want to use as the password for the M aster user     6 Click SQL  gt  Executein Text  or click   in the toolbar    See also SET SECURITY in SQL Engine Reference      gt  To turn off security using PSQL Explorer    You must be logged into the computer as an administrator or as a member of the Pervasive Admin  Operating system security group     y       Caution Turning off security allows all operating system users to access the database if database  security is Mixed or Database mode     Database user names  passwords  and permissions are retained but not used if security isturn off  If  security is re enabled  the previous user names  passwords  and permissions take effect again   An  exception is the M aster user  The M aster password is not retained nor re  applied            _    In PSQL Explorer  expand the Engines node  then the Databases node   Right click on the desired database then click Properties    Click Security in the Properties tree    Click the Security tab    Click Enable Security to clear the option    Click OK    Database security is now off     ao oa A   WO N    83    Using PSQL Control Center     gt  To turn off security using SQL    y       Caution Turning off security allows all operating system users to access the database if database  security is Mixed or Database mode     Da
135. e not expired     Thesum is the total number of users who can concurrently connect to the database engine on the  server        Note An easier way to determine the total user count is with M onitor  See Monitoring Resource  Usage in Advanced Operations Guide  The    M aximum    value for User Count is the total user count  for the permanent license  all user count increase licenses  and any temporary licenses that have not  expired        To Determine the Session Count Limit    Ensure that the server namein the title bar is the server for which you want determine a session  count limit  If not  select a different server as described in To Select a Server for License  Administration     For a particular product  total the session count values that appear in the License Information list  in the    Session Count    column  Exclude any values for expired temporary licenses     For example  total all values for the permanent license  all session count increases  and any  temporary licenses that have not expired  The sum isthe total number of sessions that can  concurrently connect to the database engine on the server for that particular product  the session  count limit      License Administration T asks       Note An easier way to determine the session count limit is with M onitor  See M onitoring Resource  Usage in Advanced Operations Guide  The    M aximum    value for Session Count is the session count  limit for the permanent license  all session count increase licenses  and 
136. eboot     You must remove it from the Windows Startup group  Check the operating system documentation for  Startup     PCC  frequently asked questions about PCC     231    Basic Troubleshooting    How do  start PCC on Linux   Certain requirements must be met before you can start PCC on Linux  See Starting PCC On Linux     Security  frequently asked questions about security     When do I log in using an operating system user and password  and when do I log in using a  database user and password     This may seem confusing at first  but in fact there is only one rule  use a database login only after you  have already successfully connected to the server and are attempting to access a database directly  Up  until this point  you should use an operating system login     For example  if you run Monitor or Configuration to work with aremote server engine  you are  prompted for a password  In both cases  you must supply a user name and password for an operating  system account that has administrative permissions on the remote system  or an account thatisa  member of Pervasive Admin  This applies also when you are creating a new database     Once you start to work with the data itself  then you must supply a database user and password  if  prompted  If database security is turned off  then you would never need a database user name or  password  In this case  you would only need an operating system user and password to perform  administrative tasks  as noted in the preceding paragraph
137. ecific to the graphical user interface     GUI Visual Reference    The following image shows the GUI  The table below the image describes the GUI objects  Click on an  area of the image for which you want more information                             GUI Object   Description Related Information  Server By default  shows the name of the server that the License Administrator is To Select a Server for  Name accessing  License Administration  This object is also an entry field into which you can type the name of a server  If    Return to GUI Dialog  you have typed in a server name but not clicked Connect  or pressed Enter   image   the field can contain a server name that differs from the one in the title bar  The  title bar always shows the server that License Administrator is accessing   The Server Name field can also be populated if you click Browse and choose  a server   Connect Establishes communication between License Administrator and the computer To Select a Server for  listed in the Server Name field  License Administration   Return to GUI Dialog  image   Browse Allows you to choose a server on which to administer licenses  To Select a Server for  License Administration   Return to GUI Dialog  image   Key Accepts a key  a combination of letters and numbers  typed in or pasted  License Administration  Concepts  To Authorize a Key   Return to GUI Dialog  image   Authorize Authorizes the key entered in the Key field ono the specified database engine    Authorize a Product  T
138. ed     2 Enter the following at a command prompt  where authorization_filenamepky is the file created in  step 2 of Phase 2     clilcadm  a authorization_filename pky  PSQL is now authorized      gt  To Deauthorize a Key Offline  Deauthorizing a key offline requiresthat you contact PSQL Support     Telephone Authorization    In the event that it is not possible to authorize keys online  remotely  or offline  you can authorize PSQL  Server  PSQL Vx Server  or Workgroup using telephone authorization     Telephone authorization requires that you have completed a successful installation of PSQL Server or  Workgroup and have a valid product key  If you do not have a product key  you can obtain one from  Actian Corporation or your software vendor  Telephone authorization is available by calling  1 800 287 4383 toll free in the United States or 00800 1212 3434 toll free in Europe     To authorize a key via telephone authorization  you can use the command line utility or the PSQL  PhoneAuthorization Wizard  The PhoneAuthorization Wizard is available on Windows and Linux and  guides you through the steps necessary to authorize your PSQL product     ga  Ao       Tip When authorizing the Workgroup Engine  you need to elevate the privileges of the database  engine before authorizing a key with a licensing utility         gt  To Authorize a Key Using the PSQL Phone Authorization Wizard    1 Ensure that you have completed a successful installation of PSQL Server or Workgroup and a have  a 
139. ed by  atab on top of the editor  Thetab contains thenameof the object  Data modified within an editor must  be explicitly saved  for example  with File  gt  Save      Views  such as PSQL Explorer  can be opened only one at atime  Your actions within a view are applied  immediately  without your having to save them     Editor and View Characteristics  The following table summarizes the characteristics of the editors and views   Table7 Characteristics of PCC Window Views                         Characteristic PSQL Explorer   SQL Editor   Grid   Text   Outline   Table Editor  Contains icons specific to that view Y Y Y   Can be closed Y Y Y Y Y   Can be minimized Y Y Y   Can be maximized Y Y Y Y Y   Can be restored to previous size Y Y   Can be opened in new window Y Y Y Y Y   Can be rearranged within PCC main window Y Y Y Y Y   Can be  pulled  from PCC and placed on desktop Y Y Y                            47    UsingPSQL Control Center    PSQL Explorer  This view displays a tree of objects of various types and enables you to do many tasks       Objects and Their Properties  a Right click Tasks    Objects and Their Properties    Thetree of objects includes a root node named PSQL  The root node contains objects such as clients   services  if applicable   database engines  databases  tables  views  stored procedures  user defined  functions  triggers  groups  users  and system objects  such as system tables      M ost objects in PSQL Explorer can be expanded to reveal more detail
140. eferences for SQL Editor  click SQL Editor      Grid Window View    PCC provides a command to execute an individual SQL statement in SQL Editor so that the results  appear in the Grid view  The command is called Execute in Grid and can be invoked from the SQL  menu  from a toolbar button  or from within the Outline view          Note The Grid is also used by Table Editor to show table data when you start Table Editor  That is   when you right click on a table then click Edit  See To view table data        Identifying the Grid Window    TheGrid window view  or Grid for short  shows the columns and data in a table  The Grid uses a matrix  format  like a spreadsheet  to show theresult of running SQL SELECT statements  statements that return  data      151    SQL Editor    Figure23 Grid Window View       ToPervasive SOL     2 01  E Room    o    BE Outline 33 Ta    5 0 Pervasive  SQL  E    Local Client  P Microkemel Router    Services    33 Pervasive  SQL  relat  i   Pervasive  SOL  tran   E  q Engines  oy tm                       Building Name    Number  Capacity  Type     Roscart Building Classroom  Roscart Building Classroom  Wander Stoep Hall Classroom       S o Databases     CHECKID   1 8  DBASE9      8 DEFAULTDI    S  DEMODATA Vander Stoep Hall Classroom  E E5 Tables Vander Stoep Hall Office   El Bilin Vander Stoep Hall Classroom   E Clas Wander Stoep Hall Classroom             E  Cou Vander Stoep Hall Office  E  Dep Vander Stoep Hall Office    a End   Woodward Building     
141. en a new SQL Editor tab        Click OK     SQL Editor appears as a new window view in PCC  By default  PCC names the new document  SQLDocn  wheren isan integer that starts with 1 and increments by 1  The document name appears  in thetab for SQL Editor     To start SQL Editor by displaying all records in a table   Start PCC if it is not already running   See Starting PCC on Windows    Expand the Engines and Databases nodes in PSQL Explorer    For the desired database  expand the Tables node     Double click the table for which you want to see all records  or right click the table then click  Open      By default  PCC open SQL Editor and executes a SELECT   FROM statement for thetable  N ote that  the SELECT statement can fail depending on user and column level permissions      gt  To set database context for an SQL query    The commands to execute SQL statements are disabled until a database is specified as the context to  which the SQL statement applies     1  2    3    Start PCC if it is not already running   See Starting PCC on Windows    Perform one of the following actions       For a new SQL statement  click File  gt  New  gt  SQL Document or click  si   The Select D atabase dialog appears  Click the database in the list for which you want the SQL  document to apply and click OK      If SQL Editor already contains SQL statements not associated with a database  click  g   The Select D atabase dialog appears  Click the database in the list for which you want the SQL  docu
142. enclosed by double quotes and delimited by the TAB character    Fred  t 22  t 2459  t Sales  t     TheBDU treats consecutive column delimiters as NULL values  If the utility finds consecutive column  delimiters  it inserts a NULL valueinto the column  provided the column is nullable     No qualifiers are allowed for a NULL value  The following column data inserts a NULL value in the  second column  Note that qualifiers are not included for that column   Fred  t t 2459  t Sales  t     Synopsis  bdu  database name   table name   data_file        lt e E gt  max_errors           lt r  R gt  r  get file     185    Command Line Interface Utilities      lt f   F gt  first_row       lt 1 L gt  last_row          lt t T gt  fidd_term     lt n N gt  row_term     lt o O gt  output file      lt u U gt  login_id     lt p P gt  password         lt c C gt  encoding             lt h H gt           Note When loading data with BDU into a secured database for which the Btrieve Security policy is  set to    M ixed     the supplied credentials  user name and password  must match those of a PSQL  database user account and an operating system user account        Parameters    Table17 Bulk Data Utility Parameters                Parameter Mandatory  Default Value Description  Optional  database_name Mandatory Database name to connect to the local PSQL engine  table_name Mandatory Name of the table to be populated  data_file Mandatory Name and location of the delimited text file    lt e E gt  max_error
143. er network configuration is wrong     gt  To determine the actual cause of the failure    Follow the steps below to rule out certain root causes and narrow down the possible sources of failure     1    From the operating system on a Windows client  access the Network information and see if you can  find the server computer to which you want to connect  If you can see the server  you can rule out  that the server is down or disconnected from the network     2 Nett  try to map a drive to the file server or open a shared file on the server  If you can successfully    connect to the file server and create a file on the mapped drive  then you can rule out lack of  operating system rights  You can also rule out failure to login to the correct network  If you are not  logged in to a particular network  you cannot access the servers on that network        Note If you are trying to create a new database on the server  to use M onitor against the remote  server engine  or to configure the remote server engine  you must have administrative rights on the  server  or bea member of Pervasive Admin  A simpledrive mapping or shared file read will not tell  you whether you haveadministrativerights  This means you may beableto connect to thefileserver   but you still may not be able to connect to the database engine with Configuration  Monitor  or  Create Database Wizard        3 Thenext possibility is that the client requester is disabled     Start PCC then right click the icon that represent
144. er or member  information  Each of these isa distinct  well defined collection of related information     Understanding the PSQL Database M anagement System    What is a Database Management System     As citizens of the computer age  we are surrounded by collections of information   databases    everywhere we go  Unfortunately  all this datais of no useto anyone without methods to sort it  search  it  analyzeit  and keep it current     A database management system  or DBM S  isa computer program designed to manage large amounts  of data and to allow other computer programs and peopleto interact with thedata  A DBM Scan also be  referred to informally as a database engine or simply an engine A DBMS performs the following tasks       Controls access to the data  The DBM S can act as a watchdog to prevent the wrong people from  using the data      Structures the data so it can be interpreted by other applications  The DBM S ensures that all the  data adheres to the database structure  so that other computer programs can work with the data  using common methods      Keeps the data safe and prevents it from getting garbled or lost  The DBM S facilitates backing up  the data in case of catastrophic loss  and also accesses it in a consistent manner to prevent the data  from suffering inadvertent damage      Makesit easy to add new information  find it  update it  and delete it  The DBM S readily accepts  new data and provides tools that you can use to locate  update  and remove info
145. er s Guide  which is part of the    PSQL Software Developer s Kit  SDK      1    3     gt     Ensure that the    Columns    page of Table Editor is active  If required  perform the steps for To work  with columns     Click the option box in the Null cell for the desired column     You can allow nulls only for applicable data types  A shaded square indicates that null values do not  apply to the data type                       Option State Meaning  Nulls specified  O Nulls allowed but not specified  Ol  Nulls do not apply    Also see Null Values   Click File  gt  Save or  El before changing pages within Table Editor     To set case sensitivity for a column    Case sensitivity does not apply if the key uses an alternate collating sequence  ACS   You cannot specify  case sensitivity and use an ACS     1    134    Ensure that the    Columns    page of Table Editor is active  If required  perform the steps for To work  with columns     Click the option box in the Case cell for the desired column     You can set a collating sequence only for applicable data types  A shaded square indicates that case  sensitivity does not apply to the data type                 Option State Meaning  Case insensitive  O Case sensitive  Ol Case does not apply          By default  PSQL is case sensitive when sorting string keys  Uppercase letters are sorted before  lowercase letters  If you specify case insensitive  values are sorted without distinguishing case     3    Table Editor Tasks    Click File 
146. erminates the running of a PSQL service   restart Terminates the running of a PSQL service then starts the service running again  query Specifies whether servicename is running or not    getpolicy Retrieves the type of startmode  automatic  manual  or disabled  associated with servicename  setpolicy Sets the type of startmode  automatic  manual  or disabled  associated with servicename    automatic The service starts automatically when the operating system starts    manual The service must be started manually after the operating system starts  disabled The service is disabled and does not start after the operating system starts  Examples    To start the Workgroup Engine service manually        psc start psqlWGE  To start the Cache Engine service manually        psc start psqlCE  To stop  then restart the PSQL transactional and relational services     psc restart psql all    211    Command Line Interface Utilities    Note that    psql all    is a shortcut method available only with the psc utility  It affects both the     Pervasive SQL  transactional     service and the    Pervasive SQL  relational     service  and can be used  with the psc parameters start  stop  or restart     Return Codes    Thepsc utility returns the following codes  DOS ERRORLEVEL  for the state of the service after the psc  command has been run                                                                    String Value  BTI_SERVICE_ACCESS_ DENIED 32775  BTI_SERVICE_ALREADY_RUNNING 32778  BTI_SERVICE_
147. es    See Configuration     58    Capacity U sage Viewer       Capacity Usage Viewer    PCC provides Capacity Usage Viewer to monitor concurrent sessions and data usage for all database  engines  This is especially useful when you are considering migrating between PSQL engines that use  different license models     See Capacity Usage Viewer in Advanced O perations Guide     59    UsingPSQL Control Center       Monitor    PCC integrates a M onitor utility which allows you to monitor certain activities and attributes of the  database engine  The utility can monitor aspects of the M icroKernel Engine and the Relational Engine   It presents information organized into a series of tabs  that can be rearranged for your convenience  with  columns of data that can rearranged and sorted  It presents a snapshot of a particular moment and can  be refreshed either manually or automatically     See M onitoring Database State in Advanced O perations Guide     60    Defragmenter       Defragmenter    PCC provides the Defragmenter utility to enable you to detect data file fragmentation that may be  causing loss of engine performance  Defragmenter also enables you to correct the fragmentation by  rearranging records that have become out of order and removing unused space left by deletions   Defragmenting a file does not alter its data in any way  and records can be created  read  updated  or  deleted while the files that store them are being defragmented  You can use Defragmenter features  dur
148. es set on my Btrieve files  After   created a DSN  I cannot open the files using  ODBC  What s wrong     If Btrieve files have owner names on them  you must use database security for ODBC access  Turn on  database security in PCC  SeeTo turn on security using PSQL Explorer and Owner Names and Security  in Advanced O perations Guide    lt 3   Caution Do not forget the M aster user password  You cannot turn off security or perform    administrative tasks within the database without it  You may want to makea backup copy of your  DDFs before turning security on  in case you forget the password           Next  you must grant the M aster user access to the data files that have owner names defined  You can  grant the access by issuing this SQL statement for each table that has an owner name     GRANT ALL ON my table    ownename    TO Master    When you enter thestatement  substitutethe actual nameof your tableand the appropriateowner name  for that table  as indicated above  Remember that each data file corresponds to an ODBC table  If you  don t know which table corresponds to which data file  see use PCC to find out  Right click on the table  in PCC then click Properties  Click Information in the tree  The File Name field shows you the file that  is referenced by that table definition     If security is important  then you must create users and assign permissions for all users expected to  access the database  You do this by using the CREATE GROUP and GRANT statementsin SQL  You c
149. es that nulls do not apply to the data  type  A checked square   W    indicates that NULL values are  Columns Page image   allowed for the data type        Case Specifies whether the database engine uses case sensitive or To set case sensitivity for a column  case insensitive comparisons when searching for character  values in the database  A checked square   W    indicates that  Columns Page image   case insensitive values are used  A shaded square         indicates that case sensitivity does not apply to the data type        Collate Specifies that an alternating collating sequence  ACS  is used for   To set a column collating sequence  sorting  Contains the path and ACS file name      Columns Page image                 Default Specifies a default value for the column  The default value is To set a column default  used if you perform an SQL INSERT for a row but do not provide  a value for the column   Columns Page image     Indexes Page    Thelndexes page allows you to add and delete indexes  The Indexes page is explained within the context  of the tasks that you perform for indexes  See Indexes Tasks     Foreign Keys Page    The Foreign Keys page allows you to add and delete foreign keys  The Foreign Keys page is explained  within the context of the tasks that you perform for foreign keys  See Foreign Keys Tasks     SQL View Page    TheSQL View page displays  and allows you to copy  the SQL statements used to create or alter thetable   TheCREATE TABLE panel displays the SQL
150. essingData           o    ooo    233  ODBC and DDFS  iii of ha Bond el  hw baaa 234  Upgradingfrom Btrieve6 15  0    ees 237  Uporadingand Migration Aa dca A eid a Pe A 237    Miscellaneous 22 5 si i A A Ses Boi eh MR ees E ey ia Ee  237    Contents    About This M anual    This manual introduces you to PSQL utilities for Server and Workgroup products and shows you how  to perform the basic tasks necessary to work with the application  Topics include starting and stopping  the database engine  setting up access to a database  and accessing data from other applications  This  manual also gives you a tour of the PSQL Control Center  PCC   PCC allows you to manage PSQL  utilities within a single  easy to use framework     xi       Who Should Read This Manual    This manual provides information for users who install and run PSQL client server and Workgroup  products     Actian Corporation would appreciate your comments and suggestions about this manual  As a user of  our documentation  you arein a unique position to provide ideas that can havea direct impact on future  releases of this and other manuals  If you havecomments or suggestions for the product documentation   post your request at the Community Forum on the PSQL Web site     xii       Conventions    Unless otherwise noted  command syntax  code  and examples use the following conventions     CASE    Bold    Monospaced  font          variable    Commands and reserved words typically appear in uppercase  letters  Unless yo
151. ete a DSN using ODBC Administrator  Windows platforms only   In PCC  click Tools and select ODBC Administrator    In the ODBC Administrator window  click the System DSN tab    Select the DSN you wish to remove  and click Remove   You are prompted to confirm removal of the DSN    Click Yes    After the DSN has been removed  click OK to exit ODBC Administrator     41    Using PSQL    If you aresimply deleting an unwanted DSN  you arefinished  If you need to re createthe DSN  you  should refer to one or more of the following sections        If you need to do this Refer to this section       Re create an Engine DSN on a Server engine or a Workgroup engine   One of     Setting Up Database Access on Windows    Setting Up Database Access on a Linux Server       Re create a Client DSN on a client workstation Setting Up Client Access from a Windows Client             42       chapter       Using PSQL Control Center E                A Tour of PSQL Control Center    PSQL Control Center  PCC  is a graphical tool for creating and managing databases and controlling  your database engine  It allows you to access nearly all the functions of the product from one place  The  following topics lead you on a tour of PCC to learn its interface and common operations      An Overview of PSQL Control Center   m Services on Windows Servers     Database Engines     Capacity Usage Viewer      Monitor    Defragmenter    Databases    a New Database GU   Reference     Creating  Modifying  Deleting  and Rep
152. f a table    14 In PSQL Explorer  expand the Tables node for a particular database     If you are interested in system tables  expand the Tables node under System O bjects   2 Right click on the desired table  and click Properties        Tip You can use the table properties to view a list of the indexed columns for the table         gt  To open a table    14 In PSQL Explorer  expand the Tables node for a particular database     If you are interested in system tables  expand the Tables node under System O bjects     2 Right click on the desired table  and click O pen or Open in New Window                 Theopen action performsaszLEcT   from table name query  wheretable_nameis the name of  the table that you selected      gt  To delete a table    14 In PSQL Explorer  expand the Tables node for a particular database     73    UsingPSQL Control Center    2 Right click on the desired table  and click Delete     74    Creating  Importing  and Exporting Data       Creating  Importing  and Exporting Data    The tables that you create with PCC are initially empty  You can add data to them through PCC or by  importing data  PCC provides a wizard to export data and oneto import data     Creating Data Through PCC  See To add rows of datato the Grid     Importing Data with Bulk Data Utility  See bdu in PSQL User s Guide    Importing Data with Import Data Wizard    Thelmport Data Wizard reads delimited data from a text file and adds the data to a table  The wizard  allows you to specify t
153. fer  you can usethe standard operating system dialogs for FileO pen and File Save  For example   you may haveno need to work with encodings outside the system code page  in which case you may want  to use the standard dialogs     gt  To use the standard operating system dialogs for File Open and File Save   1 In PCC  select Window  gt  Preferences then File Encoding    2 Select the option    Do not prompt for encoding during File Open and File Save       3 Click OK        Note You can also access the File Encoding preferences from the dialogs for File Open  Save File   Import Data  Export Data  and Export Schema  Click    Change default encoding    on the dialog        92    Wide Character Data Support for Import Data  Export Data  and Export Schema       Wide Character Data Support for Import Data  Export Data  and  Export Schema    Import Data  Export Data  and Export Schema now allow you to work with files containing wide  character data  You can changethefile encoding duringtheimport or export action  similar to File O pen  and File Save  See Encoding Choices     The dialog field in which you specify a file path and name defaults to the path location used for the  previous data import or export or schema export   Import Data  Export Data  and Export Schema use  the same persistence setting   A full file path and name is required to enable the import and export  actions     See also Dialogs for File O pen and File Save     Import Data Dialog    Import Data now allows you t
154. fies the driver description    Pervasive ODBC Interface    so either utility can test its DSN  connectivity            Theutility puts you in an interactive state with the database From that state  you can query the database   such aS SELECT   FROM Department                  To enable security on a database using   sql  first connect to the database as the    M aster    user  then use  the SET SECURITY statement in SQL to set the M aster user password  For example     isql DEMODATA Master  SET SECURITY   password    See SET SECURITY in SQL Engine Reference     To connect to a secured database  passthe user name and password asthe second and third parameters  respectively to the   sql utility  For example  to connect to DEM ODATA asuser    M aster    using password     vforge     enter isq164 DEMODATA Master vforge Of isql DEMODATA Master vforge                          Synopsis   lt isql   isql64 gt  DSN  UID  PWD    options   Where     DSN isthe data source name for the database to which you want to connect  Always required     UID istheuser nameto connect to the PSQL SQL database enginefor asecured database  Required only  for asecured database     PWD isthe password for UID  Required only if UID used   options is one or more of the options as defined below     206    Command Line Interface Utility Reference    Options   b Suppress prompts for batch processing  See Notes    c Display column names on first row  use with  d    dx Delimit columns with character x    1 locnnam
155. fined by the specific operating system  OS   such  as Windows File Sharing     Only the Server engine can enforce OS level file security based on the privileges assigned to the login  user name  The Workgroup product does not attempt to do this  In a small office  where Workgroup  engines are most common  this can be considered a plus because they are usually short on networking  experts  and the fewer barriers to successful data access the better     14    chapter       Using PSQL E             A Walk through of Basic U ser Tasks    This chapter covers the basic tasks you need to know to work with PSQL databases  Included in this  chapter are the following sections      Starting and Stopping the Database Engine   a Granting Administrative Rights for the D atabase Engine     Setting Up ODBC Database Access   m Setting up Database Access with PCC     Accessing Data on a Remote Engine Using PCC     Accessing Data via ODBC From Other Applications     DeletingDSNs    15       Using PSQL       Starting and Stopping the Database Engine    Thissection outlines how to start and stop the PSQ L engine  Someengine configuration parameters  you  need to stop and restart the enginein order for a particular change in your configuration to take effect     To start and stop the database engine  follow the instructions for your engine and platform      m Starting and Stopping the Server Engine on a Windows Server  a Starting and Stopping the Workgroup Engine on Windows    Starting and Stoppin
156. for the desired permission   A check mark indicates that the permission applies   Click OK      gt  To assign permissions for a user using PSQL Explorer    kh O N      6       Note You cannot assign specific permissions to a user if the user isa member of a group  The  permissions of the group apply to the user     Permissions on the Database tab override permissions on the Table tab     Expand the nodes for the desired database   Right click on the user name under the Users node then click Properties   Click Permissions in the Properties tree     Click the tab to access permissions for the desired object  database  tables  and columns   stored  procedures  or views  See also Permissions on Views and Stored Proceduresin SQL EngineReference     On the tab  click the option for the desired permission   A check mark indicates that the permission applies   Click OK      gt  To assign permissions to all users using PSQL Explorer           hh OO N       Note Permissions on the Database tab override permissions on the Table tab        Expand the nodes for the desired database   Right click on the group PUBLIC under the Groups node then click Properties   Click Permissions in the Properties tree     Click the tab to access permissions for the desired object  database  tables  and columns   stored  procedures  or views  See also Permissions on Views and Stored Proceduresin SQL EngineReference     87    Using PSQL Control Center    88    On the tab  click the option for the desired per
157. formation Format  8 is an 8 bit variable width encoding that can    represent every character in the Unicode character set  lt was designed for backward compatibility  with ASCII and to avoid the complications of endianness and byte order marks  BOM            53    Using PSQL Control Center    Table9 Default Encoding Choices continued    Encoding Discussion       UTF 8 with BOM Same as UTF 8 except with a byte order mark  BOM    which is a Unicode character used to signal  the endianness  byte order    written to the file during the save action        UTF 16BE A UTF encoding in 16 bit with byte order of big endian  BE         UTF 16BE with BOM   Same as UTF 16BE except with a BOM written to the file during the save action        UTF 16LE A UTF encoding in 16 bit with byte order of little endian  LE         UTF 16LE with BOM   Same as UTF 16LE except with a BOM written to the file during the save action           Notes     By default  PCC remembers the encoding of a file that has been opened  If you modify the file and save your changes  the  changes are saved in the original encoding  However  if you use the PCC File Save As dialog to save your changes  the  changes are saved to the encoding specified on the dialog     PCC automatically detects the encoding of a file if the file contains a BOM and displays that encoding in the PCC File Open  dialog  If the file does has no BOM and byte order is important  you need to select the proper encoding for the save action           N
158. functions  and views                Note If you use SQL Editor to change the structure of table with SQL statements  refresh the PSQL  Explorer to see the change  Right click on the Tables nodein PSQL Explorer then click Refresh     General Tasks    General tasks orient you to the overall use of SQL Editor     To start SQL Editor for anew SQL query   To start SQL Editor by displaying all records in a table  To set database context for an SQL query   To identify editor settings for SQL Editor   To create an SQL query or script   To open an SQL script   To type comments into SQL Editor   To cancel  undo  or restore  redo  typing actions in SQL Editor  To find text or replace text in SQL Editor   To select text in SQL Editor   To perform basic editing functions in SQL Editor    Execution Tasks    Execution tasks apply to the running of SQL statements     To enable the execution commands and icons for SQL statements  To run asingle SQL statement in SQL Editor   To run selected SQL statementsin SQL Editor   To run all SQL statements in SQL Editor   To run SQL statements in Outline view    157    SQL Editor    Grid Tasks  Grid tasks apply to working with the Grid window       To change data within the Grid     To add rows of data to the Grid     To delete row s  of data from the Grid     To enter a date  time  or timestamp data type in the Grid using scalar functions    To refresh data in the Grid     To copy data from the Grid    Text View Tasks  Text view tasks apply to working w
159. g on the server that are shared and yet PSQL cannot read them  What s wrong        amusing SQL queries to create a definition for an old table  The resulting record size is off  Why     228    Frequently Asked Questions        want to convert my data file version from 9 back to file format version 8  7  or 6  How do   do this     ODBC and DDFs       Howcan  tell if  can use ODBC to access my data files        How can a hard coded filepath in a DDF be changed    a What is the best way to ensure that my data dictionaries  DDFs  are safe       How can   tell whether   have non standard DDFs      Can  mix and match DDFs from different databases      What happened to DDF Sniffer     a   havetwo similar Btrievefiles  and   created a DDF for the first one  Sincethey are similar  can   use  the same DDF on the second Btrieve file         have owner names set on my Btrieve files  After   created a DSN    cannot open the files using  ODBC  What s wrong       Istherea client side requester for the Relational Engine       ISODBC theonly method of access for PSQL     a Isthereasingle database file housing all the data  data definitions  stored procedures  security  table  relationships  and so on asin some other products         Doesthe Relational Engine have scheduler capabilities to run stored procedures or other types of  scripts designed to access and affect data     Upgrading from Btrieve 6 15  a  Isthereatool that replaces Xtrieve     Upgrading and Migration    Upgrading and Migrati
160. g the Database Engine on Linux    Starting and Stopping the Server Engine on a Windows Server    On Windows server environments  PSQL Server runs as services  The services are loaded as part of the  installation process and are set to be always available if you followed the default installation     Services Dependencies    Additional PSQL products such as DataExchange also install services  DataExchange depends on both  PSQL Transactional Engine and PSQL Relational Engine services     Thefollowingtablesummarizesthe behavior of the dependent services for start  stop  and restart actions  of the database engine services     Notethat the behavior of the dependent servicesisthe sameregardless with which application you start   stop  or restart the database engine services  PCC  Windows Services  Net Start  PSC      Table4 Action of Dependent Services Based on Action of Database Engine Services    Database Engine Service Start Stop Restart   Service Action for  Data Exchange       PSQL Transactional Engine Y no action    Y Stop    Y Restart             PSQL Relational Engine Y no action    Y Stop    Y Restart                         If you start the service for DataExchange  the PSQL Relational Engine starts as a prerequisite service        Note The dependent services stop without displaying a message that they will be stopped         gt  To start the database services on a Windows server using PCC  See To start or stop services     16    Starting and Stopping the D atabase Engine
161. gt        omode  lt  0 1  1    4 gt     host      srv host        srv port     port      translate  lt  none    auto  gt     Name of the database  local or remote  to which the DSN is associated   The Data Source Name   Display syntax and options help for the dsnadd utility   List existing DSNs   Specify the default file open mode for files opened with the current connection  The default    is 0  or    Normal     Can be used only with local connections  not remote client connections  For  more information on file open modes  see DSN Open Mode in ODBC Guide     Server host name    Server port number  The default is 1583   See also Changing the Default Communication  Ports in Getting Started With PSQL      Encoding translation to use for character data  The default is    none     meaning that no  character data is translated between the client and server on the assumption that the client  and server use the same operating system encoding     See Automatic in ODBC Guide     The following options are used to create deprecated  legacy style DSNs      clntdsn     engdsn     sdsn     Create a deprecated  legacy style Client DSN with the driver description    Pervasive ODBC  Client Interface        Rather than using Client DSNs  new applications or revised 32 bit applications should create  a DSN that connects to a named database using  db      Create a deprecated  legacy style Engine DSN with the driver description    Pervasive ODBC  Engine Interface        Rather than using Engine 
162. he Server Name field shows the server on which the database engine is  runnin Increase User Count or  g   Data In Use  This button is enabled if the key in the Key field is valid and a database engine    is running on the specified computer  To Authorize a Key   Return to GUI Dialog  image        105    License Administration    Product    Server Name     Key     DEV Connect    Authorize J    License Information     Product Key State Platform License Type UserCount Session Count DatalnUseGB Expiration Date Yendor Application       Pervasive PSOL 11 Server n a Active Windows Temporary n a 12 23 2012                                     106       This button is enabled when a Product name is selected in the License  Information list        Y  Hide Expired   Deauthorize    Repar    Remaining Authorization  Help   Close   GUI Object   Description Related Information   License Lists the license information for the specified computer  License Models   Information A L   Product     The name of the PSQL product  such as Server  Vx Server  or To Display License  Workgroup  Information    Product Key     The Product Key number associated with the corresponding  product license   Return to GUI Dialog    State     The status of the Product Key  Values are Active  Inactive  Expired  image   Disabled and Failed Validation   A license can be disabled if certain hardware  configuration items have changed since the key was applied       Platform     The combination of PSQL product  operating s
163. he following     a Text file that contains the data to import   a Field delimiter      m Encoding of the imported data  The encoding must match the encoding that was used to export the  data  See Exporting Data with Export Data Wizard       Whether or not the first line of the exported data contains the column names  If the data was  exported with column names as the first line  it be must imported the same way     Restrictions   The data must use a field delimiter of the comma  colon  or tab character  A combination of carriage  return and line feed must delimit records     gt  To import data into a database table   1 For a particular database  right click a table name under the Tables node     This is the table into which you want to import the data  If you are interested in system tables   expand the Tables node under System O bjects     2 Click Import Data   3  Providetheimport characteristics as discussed above  then click Finish     Exporting Data with Export Data Wizard    The Export Data Wizard exports data from a table to a text file A combination of carriage return and  line feed delimits records     The wizard lets you specify the following     a Nameofthefileto which the datais exported  If you includea path with thefile name  the directory  or directories in the path must already exist       SQL statement on which the export is based  For example  SELECT   FROM t1 would export all  records from table t1     a Field delimiter  character used to separate data items
164. heincreaseisimmediately available when you authorizethekey  A restart of the database engine is not  required     To authorizean increasekey  you must already have a permanent product key present on thesystem  The  software vendor ID number for an increase key must match the vendor ID number for an installed  permanent key  Increase keys obtained from Actian Corporation are universal  That is  they are  compatible with any permanent key from any vendor     Increasing User Count    You increase the user count by authorizing a user count increase  U Cl  key  See To Authorize a Key and  To Determine a Total User Count  UCI keys are provided by Actian Corporation or an application  vendor     If you deauthorizea permanent product key  all user count increase keys associated with that permanent  key arealso deauthorized  If you deauthorizeaU CI key  only the user count increase associated with that  UCI key is deauthorized     Trial versions of the software include a trial license that have a set user count that cannot be increased     103    License Administration    Increasing Data In Use Limit    Actian Corporation or an application vendor offers a key to increase the data in use limit  You  immediately increase the value of the data in use limit when you authorize the key  A restart of the  database engine is not required  A permanent key must be present to authorize an increase key  An  increase key cannot be authorized onto a temporary key  See To Authorize a Key and To Dete
165. his creates a DSN with the description    Pervasive ODBC Interface    that can be used by both a 32   bit application and a 64 bit application on the server  The DSN isnot visible as an    engine DSN    in  ODBC Administrator running on a Windows client     a ToaddaDSN on a client that connects to a named database on a server   dsnadd  dsn MyDSN  db DBname  host psqlhost    This creates a DSN with the description    Pervasive ODBC Interface    that can be used by both a 32   bit application and a 64  bit application on the client         To add a deprecated  legacy style Client DSN with the description    Pervasive ODBC Client  Interface    executethe following command     dsnadd  dsn MyDSN  sdsn engineDSN  host psqlhost  cintdsn  Note that the DSN is accessible only to 32 bit applications       To add a deprecated  legacy style engine DSN on the server with the description    Pervasive ODBC  Engine Interface        dsnadd  dsn myDSN  db DBname  engdsn   Note that the DSN is accessible only to 32 bit applications   a To list existing DSNs    dsnadd  1  Where   myDSN   sa name you want to assign to the new data source   DBname is the name of the named database on the PSQL host   psqlhost is the name of the host where your PSQL Server is installed   engineD SN is the name of the engine DSN on the PSQL host     201    Command Line Interface U tilities    Options    The following options are the most commonly used      db    dsn name     dsn    help       openmode  lt 0  1  1  4 
166. ies                                           Local Security Policy    YI Data Sources  ODBC   fi  Event Viewer    Author      Telnet Server Admir Run as             f    access this computer from the net     Bact as part of the operating system    Everyone Users PO        5 1 5 21 7765617                               2 34 Local Policies 12  Add workstations to domain  1 09 Audit Policy R   Back up files and directories Backup Operators      Ca User Rights Assignment RE Bypass traverse checking Everyone Users Po        3 Security Options RE  change the system time Power Users  Admini         Public Key Policies  88  Create a pagefile Administrators  2 TP Security Policies on Local Machine R   Create a token object  Re  create permanent shared objects  E2 Debug programs Administrators    5 Inthepolicy pane  right click Act as part of the operating system  then click Security     6 Click Add        Local Setting      RS  Access this computer from the network Everyone Users Po            Act as part of the operating system  5 1 5 21 7765617     tv  Add workstations to domain   R Back up files and directories  Re Bypass traverse checking FOSS   Rg  change the system time Power Users  Admini     8  Create a pagefile Administrators       Help    Local Security Policy Setting q 21x        e Act as part of the operating system  Local Effective  Assigned To Policy Setting Policy Setting      1 5 21 776561 741 764733703 120  2660629 1001  Add       7 Inthe Name pane  click on the user
167. ification Viewer in Advanced Operations Guide     Sets up Data Source Names  DSNs  for database access  See DSN Setup  and Connection Strings in ODBC Guide     Primary utility for PSQL  Lists engines and databases available and allows  you to set properties  configure  objects  See Using PSQL Control Center           Tablel Summary of PSQL Utilities continued    Understanding the PSQL Database M anagement System                Utility name Supported Description  platforms   PSQL System Analyzer Windows Analyzes system components and runs communication tests  See PSQL  System Analyzer  PSA     Query Plan Viewer Windows Displays query plans selected by the database engine so you can better  determine how to optimize SQL queries  See Query Plan Viewer in SQL  Engine Reference    Rebuild Windows Converts one version of MicroKernel files into another version  See    Converting Data Files in Advanced Operations Guide        Repair Database Name  SQL Editor   invoked  within PCC    Table Editor   invoked  within PCC          Windows and Linux    Windows and Linux    Windows and Linux       Associates tables with a new database if the tables are bound to an original  database name  See To repair a database name     Allows you to execute SQL statements interactively and add or edit data in  tables  See SQL Editor     Allows you to add  delete  or change the characteristics of columns within  a table  and to create a table  See Table Editor           Documentation    PSQL comes with a 
168. imited set on the Client  a Linux   Server  and a limited set on the Client    The summary of utilities in the section that follows notes which utilities are present in a server or client  install    Where to Find CLI Utilities   Please note the location based on your platform     Windows    In Windows  the utilities are installed to the BIN directory of your PSQL installation  If you installed to  the default installation location  your utilities are located in file path PSQL bin   Since the PSQL  installation places your install directory in the PATH  these utilities should be available from any  command prompt     Linux   In Linux  utilities are installed to  usr 1oca1 psql  bin  Theuser psql has the necessary environment  variables to use the utilities  If you wish to use utilities from accounts other than psql  follow these  instructions in Getting Started With PSQL  PSQL Account M anagement on Linux    Utilities by Platform and Engine Type    Thefollowingtables outlinesthe command line utilities  the platform on which they are made available   as well as if a graphical user interface is available for the utility     Utility Description GUI Available Windows Linux    Server   Client   Server   Client       bcfg Configures PSQL components PSQL Control Center  see   Yes Yes Yes Yes  Configuration Reference in  Advanced Operations          Guide   bdu Imports data into a database No Yes No Yes No  bmon Monitors PSQL activity Monitor Utility  see Yes Yes    Monitoring in Adv
169. in PSQL Supported Data Types and that appear  in the    Type    selection list on the Columns page in Table Editor     Null Values  Theability to modify the null attribute of a column is subject to the following restrictions       Thetarget column cannot havea PRIMARY FOREIGN KEY constraint defined on it        Ifconvertingtheold typeto thenew type causes an overflow  arithmetic or size   the ALTER TABLE  operation is aborted        Ifanullable column contains NULL values  the column cannot be changed to a non nullable  column     If you must change the data type of a key column  you can do so by deleting the index key  changing the  data type  and re adding the key  Keep in mind that you must ensure that all associated index key  columns in the database remain synchronized     For example  if you have a primary index key in table T 1 that is referenced by foreign keys in tables T 2  and T3  you must first delete the foreign keys  Then you delete the primary key and change all three  columns to the same data type and size  Finally  you must re add the primary key and then the foreign  keys     For additional information on nulls  see the following       Rebuild Utility Concepts in Advanced Operations Guide  m INSERT in SQL Engine Reference  a Null Valuein PSQL Programmer s Guide  which is part of the PSQ L Software D eveloper   s Kit  SDK      Indexes Page    The Indexes page lets you add and modify indexes and index segments  See Indexes Tasks for the tasks  that you perform
170. in the table above and ask     What is the value of that field        Row or Record    Another element is called a row  or a record  A row isa collection of all the values for one particular  instance  For example  one entry in the phone book  complete with name  address  and phone number   is one record or row     Cell    A cell isa column within a specific record  You can think of it as the intersection of a row and a column   Each cell has a specific value  For example  you might tell a co worker     The value of the cell located at  row 2  column 3   s 12345      Key Concepts    Table    A collection of rows and columns makes up a table  A table is a set of data that shares exactly the same  structure  Tables generally have names that describe the contents of the table  For example  the table  above is called    Phone Book     With PSQL  each table is stored as a separate data file on the hard disk     Index    An index is an ordered list of all the values in a particular column  A table can have zero or moreindexes  on it  The database engine uses indexes to find specific records in the database without having to step  through every record one at a time  Creating indexes on columns which will frequently be used in  database searches is likely to improve the performance of your database     Database    A databaseisa collection of oneor moretables  The datain thetables does not need to be related among  the various tables  but usually there are many relations  For example 
171. index    Only the database engine can add an index to an IDENTITY or SMALLIDENTITY column  However   you can include an IDENTITY or SM ALLIDENTITY column as part of a multiple segment index     Table Editor permits you to include an IDENTITY or aSMALLIDENTITY column in the Indexes list if  you have not saved the table  However  the DBM S returns an error when you attempt to save the table   After you deletethel DENTITY or SM ALLIDENTITY column from thelist  you may then savethe table     1    Ensure that the    Indexes    page of Table Editor is active  If required  perform the steps for To work  with indexes     Click Add   The New Index dialog displays   Type the name of the new index and click OK        Tip For a list of database object lengths and invalid characters  see Identifier Restrictions by  Identifier Type in Advanced Operations Guide     The new index appears in the Indexes list and the Index Segment Details display        Note New indexes are created by default as Normal        4 Select Partial in the Index Segment Details area to designate the index as partial     Note that the first column is populated into the Columns list     139    Table Editor    Index Editor  Indexes    Elindex_01   Add          Index Segment Details    Ounique   Partial    Normal    v  Allow Modifications                SortOrder    Ascending    Columns  Student_ID  Student ID       Amount_Paid    5 IntheColumns list  select the Column to designate for the Index or Index Segment     AS  
172. ing database engine execution with no need for down time or disruption of business operations in  most cases     See M onitoring Data File Fragmentation in Advanced Operations Guide     61    Using PSQL Control Center       Databases    A database is a collection of data stored together  N ewly created databases are empty and may be  populated with tables  Refer to thechapter PSQL Databases in Advanced Operations Guidefor a detailed  discussion of databases     The properties of a database include such items as file locations  referential constraints  security  and  whether the database is bound        _    hh OO N       Note If you wish to add a database to a Server engine  you must have administrative rights on the  server operating system  If you do not have administrative rights  you will not be permitted to add  the database        To log out from a database engine   In PSQL Explorer  expand the Engines node    Expand the node for the registered server to display the databases on that server   Right click on the database from which you want to log out    Click Logout  name      Namereflects the name of the user currently logged in to the database  If the database does not have  security enabled  nameis Master  N ame may also be M aster if the current user is logged in as M aster     Any nodes expanded for the database are collapsed     Database Properties    You set properties for a database from a Properties dialog in PCC  The dialog contains a tree with the  following 
173. ing of moving from a PSQL engine with concurrent user licensing to one with capacity   based licensing  How do   determine the appropriate size for my data use license     Capacity Usage Viewer was designed for this purpose  Becauseit records both peak daily session use and  peak daily data usage  you can see how much of each you use over time  You can use this information to  make a reasonable determination of what license capacity size you need  Refer to Capacity Usage Viewer  for information about how to access and use Capacity Usage Viewer     Networking  frequently asked questions about networking     How do  know which protocol   am using for communication  I can see other systems in  Network Neighborhood but I can   t get to my data     Start PSQL System Analyzer and click Next on the Welcome screen  On the following screen  check the  box Test Network Communications and make sure all the other boxes are not checked  Click Next  In  the following screen  cancel the selected protocols that you do not want to test  Click Browse to select  the drive that you have mapped to the installation directory on the server  You must have a mapped  drive  UNC names are not supported  Click Next to run the network tests  The results window tells you  if there are any significant problems with your networking     Difficulty Accessing Data   Frequently asked questions about accessing data    l upgraded from Btrieve v6 x or earlier to PSQL v12  Now I get error messages telling me that a
174. inking a table  select the Save The Login ID And Password check box to store the  information for thetablein the current database  so that users will not have to enter it each time  If  you leavethe check box cleared  all users must enter thelogon ID and password every timethey open  the table with M icrosoft Access in each new session  Your network administrator can also choose to  disable this check box  requiring all users to enter a user nameand password each time they connect  to the database        If the database you want does not appear in the ODBC Source list  seeBefore You Begin     8 TheAccess Link Tables dialog box opens  Click each tablethat you want to import or link  and then  click OK        Note M icrosoft Access cannot display morethan 256 columnsin atable  If you need to display more  than 256 columns  you may wish to usea different tool        Linking to your PSQL data is complete  As shown in the figure below  Access presents you with  options for designing the new database  View the linked tables by double clicking the table name     39    Using PSQL    Figurel6 UsingPSQL Data in Microsoft Access                El Microsoft Access         File Edit view Insert Tools Window Help    JO se SR  se es o     B   else e  Q         g   db3   Database  2  open DE Desion iNew   x   Bo E   8 Tables    as  Queries    Create table in Design view       Create table by using wizard  Create table by entering data  Billing   ES Forms Class  Reports    3  Pages    Course 
175. interact with desktop       This account     Logging On as    This Account       If you change the Log on as setting to This account  you must change the user rights policy Act as part  of the operating system for the account  Otherwise  remote login fails     For example  the Monitoring utility requires that you log in to the operating system on the machine  where the database engineis running  You will receive a message that login failed if the account specified  for This account cannot act as part of the operating system     Note that even the Administrator account requires that you set the user rights policy for Act as part of  the operating system     You specify This account on the services property sheet     Log on as        Local System account    V Allow service       This account  Administrator    Password        Confirm password     User Rights Policy Tasks  The following tasks explain how to change the user rights policy      gt  To Set User Rights Policy on Windows 32 bit Platforms  1 Access the operating system Control Panel    2 Doubleclick Administrative Tools    3 Right click Local Security Policy  then click Open     22    Granting Administrative Rights for the Database Engine    J Administrative Tools    File Edit View Favorites Tools Help  Back     gt   gt   87   Asearch  Folders    Address a Administrative Tools    PE Component Services  ey Computer Management                               PRA Services    Tree      5 Security Settings        Account Polic
176. ion Tasks    162    To enable the execution commands and icons for SQL statements  Follow the steps for To set database context for an SQL query     To run a single SQL statement in SQL Editor  Position the cursor on the statement or select the statement   Perform one of the following actions       Click SQL  gt  Executein Grid or SQL  gt  Executein Text     Press F9 or Shift F9       Click EN or E     Note SQL Editor automatically uses the Text window view for the results of SQL statements that are  not SELECT statements  Only SELECT statements use the Grid window view           SQL Editor Tasks    To run selected SQL statements in SQL Editor    Press and hold down the left mouse button and drag the cursor across the statement that you want  to run     You may select one or more statements   Perform one of the following actions       Click SQL  gt  Execute in Text or SQL  gt  Execute All SQL Statements     Press Shift F9       Click   or ET     Note SQL Editor automatically uses the Text window view for the results of SQL statements that are  not SELECT statements  Only SELECT statements use the Grid window view            gt  To run all SQL statements in SQL Editor    1    3    Click SQL  gt  Execute All SQL Statements  press F10  or click ET    Ensurethat either no statements are selected or that all statements are selected  If you select a portion  of the statements in SQL Editor  only the selected portion executes    To run SQL statements in Outline view    To execute al
177. ions Guide  See Configuration Through CLI Utility     184    Command Line Interface Utility Reference    bdu    Description    TheBulk Data Utility  BDU  isa command lineutility that allows you to load data from a delimited text  fileinto aPSQL table  The table and database must already exist     TheBDU  the table  the database  and the PSQL database engine must all be located on the same  machine  The delimited text file must be locally accessible by the database engine server through a local  drive  mapped drive  mounted folder  or shared folder     You may use a default delimiter or a user specified delimiter  The delimiting character must not be  contained in the data itself  The following tables list the permissible delimiters     Table15 Delimiters for Columns    Delimiter Indicated By       Tab  t  default        Any single printable character  control characters are not     A  t     and so forth   printable  except null  tab  new line  and carriage return                 Note PSQL does not support the use of NULL terminator  10  or double quote     as column  delimiters        Table16 Delimiters for Rows          Delimiter Indicated By  New line character  n  default   Carriage return  r   Carriage return line feed  CR LF   r n             TheBDU supports only the single quote     and the double quote     characters as text qualifiers  The  data file may contain column values enclosed by single quotes or by double quotes  For example  the  following column values are 
178. irectory in the logs folder   For default locations of PSQ L files  see Where arethePSQL files installed  in Getting Started With PSQL     What is the remote default location for the log file     The default location for the log file is always the directory where psawizrd exe is located on a Windows  machine     What kind of information is contained in the log file   Thelog file records any process performed by PSA and includes the associated timestamp     What happens to the information in the log file each time the utility is run     New information is appended to the log file each time PSA runs if the option Append to log file is  selected  see Figure 26   If the option is cleared  the log file contains only information for that particular  execution of PSA     How do   run PSA   See To start PSA     When would   want to use PSA   The following lists the most common situations where you would want to use PSA       You are encountering network errors and wish to test your client s connectivity to a machine  running a PSQL database engine      Your application is not functioning correctly and you wish to test connectivity to the database  engine    m You wish to view the PSQL components on the system  loaded in memory  or both     172    PSA GUI Visual Reference       PSA GUI Visual Reference    The following dialog in PSA provides access to its functionality  Click on an area of the figure to learn  more about the item     Figure26 PSA Main Dialog      View loaded Pervasive
179. is  You must create a  client DSN on your local computer to provide access to data on the server through the remote server  DSN  To createa client DSN  followtheinstructionsin Setting Up Client Access from a WindowsClient   You must first make surethat a server DSN exists on the server you want to access       get a message about Engine components    version is different than my client  components  version    When a client requester first connects to an engine  the client requester compares   ts internal router  version with the value returned from the engine by a Btrieve Version  26  call  If the client version is  older than the engine  a message dialog box is displayed on the client system with the message    Engine  components Version is different from Client s    along with a suggestion to run PSQL System Analyzer   PSA   The same message is also logged in the client s PVSW LOG file     This message is a warning  The client is not prevented from connecting to the engine in this situation   However  Actian Corporation guarantees compatibility between engines and clients only if the clients  arethe same version as the database engines  When prompted by this message  if you choose not to run  PSA and archive your old client components and install anewer client  you can expect the product to  behave unpredictably until the client version is equal to the engine version             Note Actian Corporation recommends that you use client requesters that are the same version asth
180. ision    Precision specifiesthe number of significant digits for floating point values     1    3  4  5    Ensure that the    Columns    page of Table Editor is active  If required  perform the steps for To work  with columns     Click in the Precision cell for the desired column     You can set precision only for applicable data types  such as DECIM AL  If precision isnot applicable   the grid cell is shaded and you will be unable to edit the Precision     Delete the existing value   Type the precision value you want   Click File  gt  Save or  El before changing pages within Table Editor      gt  To set a column scale    Scale specifies the number of significant digits that areto the right ofthe decimal point for floating point  values     1    2    Ensure that the    Columns    page of Table Editor is active  If required  perform the steps for To work  with columns     Click in the Scale cell for the desired column     133    Table Editor    4  5     gt     For  INS    You can set a scale value only for applicable data types  such as NUM ERIC  If scaleis not applicable   the grid cell is shaded and you will be unable to edit the Scale     Delete the existing value   Type the scale value you want   Click File  gt  Save or  El before changing pages within Table Editor     To set a column to allow or disallow nulls    additional information about nulls  see Rebuild Utility Concepts in Advanced O perations Guide   ERT in SQL Engine Reference  and Null Value in the PSQL Programm
181. istrators who are a  member of group pvsw  The ones below the line are the current user   s entries  If you have a global and a user  entry for the same server  the user   s entry overrides the global    g Manipulates default settings for all users  Settings created with  g can be overridden by individual users    m Modifies a server entry for a user specified by the  u parameter  If no user is specified  current user is assumed    p Specifies the password for the user  If not provided  pvnetpass prompts for a password    r Removes a server entry for a user specified by the  u parameter  If no user is specified  current user is  assumed   server Server  local or remote  to which you want to add a connection entry  Server can be       include the single  quotes  to set the default server entry information  This default entry is used when there is no user entry for the  server    u Specifies the name of the user  If  u is not specified  your current user name will be used   See Also    Setting Up Client Access from a Windows Client    217    Command Line Interface Utilities    Examples   From current user to all servers  overrides  g   pvnetpass  a      p password   From current user to oneserver  myserver   overrides  g   pvnetpass  a myserver  p password   From all users   g  to one server  myserver  using credentials joe password  pvnetpass  g  a myserver  u joe  p password   From all users   g  to all servers        use default credentials joe password  pvnetpass  g  a     
182. it d psql force    19    Using PSQL       Granting Administrative Rights for the Database Engine    This section begins by outlining those PSQL v12 tasks that require administrative level access at the  operating system level and those that do not  The section then walks you through the steps to grant a  user administrative level access for each of the supported operating systems        Note This section only applies to the Server engine unless otherwise noted        Tasks Requiring Administrative Rights  Administrative level rights are required to       create and configure named databases and tables    view or modify a table design with Table Editor  a set engine configuration options     view and set engine monitoring values     view certain engine configuration settings     restarting the engine when running as a service    How Administrative Rights are Granted  To have administrator level access you must either       possess full administrator level rights on the machine on which the database engineis running  a  domain administrator  for example  may lack full permissions on certain local machines     or    beamember of the operating system group Pervasive Admin     To modify a table design with Table Editor  you must have full administrator rights on the machine on  which the database engine is running even if you are a member of the Pervasive Admin group        Note For Linux servers  administrator level rights can be granted only by using the btadmin utility  to add 
183. ith the Text window       To clear results from Text view    To select and copy text from Text view    Outline View Tasks  Outline view tasks apply to working with the Outline window   a To minimize  Maximize  or restore Outline view size    Common SQL Object Tasks    Common SQL Object tasks apply to working with triggers  stored procedures  user defined functions   and views       To create a common SQL object    To modify a common SQL object    To delete a common SQL object    General Tasks     gt  To start SQL Editor for a new SQL query  4 Start PCC if it is not already running   See Starting PCC on Windows    2 Click File  gt  New  gt  SQL Document or click        The Select D atabase dialog box appears     3 Click the database in the list for which you want the SQL document to apply  or ensure that the  option Noneis check marked if the SQL document does not apply to a specific database        Note The option None is selected by default if an object other than a database  or any of the nodes  subordinate to a database  is selected in PSQL Explorer     Note that the commands to execute SQL statements are disabled if Noneis specified as the context   See To set database context for an SQL query     158       _    hh OO N    SQL Editor Tasks    Select the Set selected database as default for this session option to use the selected database  whenever you open a new SQL Editor tab  If you leavethis option unselected  you will be prompted  to select a database each time you op
184. itness  A 32 bit DSN and a 64 bit DSN can have the same name because their  bitness differs     DSN Setup and  Connection Strings in  ODBC Guide    Automatic in ODBC Guide  Additional Utilities     back to Figure 20              67    Using PSQL Control Center       Creating  Modifying  Deleting  and Repairing PSQL Databases    The following tasks pertain to databases     To create a new database   To modify properties of a database  To delete a database   To repair a database name    For conceptual information on named databases  see PSQL Database Concepts in Advanced Operations  Guide      gt     68    To create a new database       Note On Linux  the owner of the directory where you want to create the database must be psa   If  not  error message 7039  Dictionary path is invalid results  Use the chown command to change  owner of the directory  For example  chown psal directoryname        In PCC PSQL Explorer  right click on the database engine for which you want the new database   Click New  gt  Database    The Create N ew Database dialog box appears  see Figure 20     Provide a name for the database and a location  see Table 1  Identifier Restrictions by Identifier  Type     The name cannot be the same as an existing DSN    Also  no two files can share the same file name and differ only in their file name extension if both  files are in the same directory  For example  do not name a data file Invoice btr and another one  Invoice mkd in the same directory  This restriction
185. itor and To run SQL statements in Outline  view     gt  To select an SQL statement separator   1 OnthePCC Window menu  click Preferences  Expand the PSQL nodeif it is not already expanded    2 Click SQL Editor    3 Select the desired choices for SQL Statement Separator     Sql Statement Separator  I   Semicolon   I    Pound        Note Based on theseparator option you select  PCC looksfor theselected character s  and identifies  each as the end of astatement  It sends each identified statement to the database engine and displays  results of that statement before sending the next statement    If you use  as a separator in a script but do not select the    Pound  option  you will receive an error  message when you run the script     If you do not select    Semicolon  as a separator  but use a semicolon asa separator in ascript anyway   you will not receive an error message if the statements are properly parsed  This is because the  database engine recognizes semicolons as separators  However  PCC will not display the results for all  the statements  It will only display results for one statement  probably the first statement   As far as  PCC is concerned  if you don t select a semicolon asa separator  statements separated by a semicolon  are a single statement      gt  To type comments into SQL Editor    Single line comments are indicated by double dashes      or doubleslashes       Each comment must be  on a separate new line or after the statement separator on an existing lin
186. ity will prompt for the passwords with this syntax   pvdbpass database username   server name    port number   This syntax includes the old and new passwords     pvdbpass database username password newpassword    server name    port number     Options  database Database in which the username is defined  this can be a database name or a server DSN   username The user whose password will be changed   password The current password for the user  You must provide the original password in order to modify it   You can either provide the password as a parameter or omit it and be prompted   newpassword The new password for the user  See Identifier Restrictions by Identifier Type in Advanced  Operations Guide for password restrictions   Note  If the new password begins with a non alphabetic character  the password must be  enclosed in single quotes  If the existing password begins with a non alphabetic character  do  not enclose it in single quotes  see examples     server name Optional  Server name on which the database is defined  If you do not specify this option  the  local machine is assumed   port number Optional  TCP port on which the SQL engine running on servername is listening  If you do not  specify this option  the default port 1583 is assumed  See also Changing the Default  Communication Ports in Getting Started With PSQL   Examples    To change the M aster user s password and be prompted   pvdbpass demodata Master    To change an existing password to one that doesnot star
187. ivileges for the database engine  For Password  type the appropriate  password for the user name you specified  Click Login  The server name appears in the License  Administrator title bar and in the Server Name field        Note For servers running a previous version of PSQL  use the license utility provided with that  version of the product         gt  To Authorize a Key    Note that the GUI License Administrator can be used for online authorization of a local machine  connected to the Internet  and for remote authorization of the database engine on a machine not  connected to the Internet     1    Ensure that the server name in thetitle bar is the server for which you want to authorize a database  engine key  If not  select a different server as described in To Select a Server for License  Administration     Type  or paste  the key into the Key field    Lowercase letters are automatically converted to uppercase   Press Enter or click the button to authorize the key    The Key field is cleared if the key is successfully authorized     Verify the new license information that appears in the License Information list   If necessary  press  F5 to refresh thelist      Thelicense is now active  You do not have to restart the database engine        Note When authorizing an increase key for user count  session count  or datain use  a permanent  license must already exist  The vendor ID of the increase key must match the vendor ID of the  permanent key           Tip Product authoriza
188. ize the  key from the unique machine signature maintained by Actian Corporation  That is  it does not  remove the record of the link between the machine signature and the key     Generates authorization request data file for offline authorization  The product key and output  filename are both required     Displays the number of remaining authorizations for the specified key     Note  If no key is specified  remaining authorization information for all product keys is displayed          lt servername   s gt    lt servername gt     Allows connection to a specified server  if specified  If not specified  the servername is assumed  to be blank  This parameter is optional          lt validate   t gt     Performs a license validation on the connected server name and selected key          lt username   u gt     The user name for the server to which you are connecting  If not specified  the username is  assumed to be blank  This parameter is optional and not required if a servername is not  specified          lt password   p gt   lt password gt     The password associated with the user name for the server to which you are connecting  If not  specified  the password is assumed to be blank  This parameter is optional and not required if  a servername is not specified          lt help   h gt     Displays information about the options and parameters          lt repair   e gt  key    Repairs and authorizes a key  if repair is possible   The Repair action requires the following  conditions 
189. l     Select Unique in the Index Segment Details area to designate the index as unique   Selecting Unique disables duplicatability  restricting duplicates   Note that the first column is populated into the Columns list     Index Editor    Indexes Index Segment Details    Elindex_01   Unique O Partial    Normal    v  Allow Modifications                Columns SortOrder  Student_ID Y Ascending   Student ID A   Transaction_Number   Log 3  Amount_Owed   Amount_Paid he       In the Columns list  select the Column to designate for the Index or Index Segment        Caution Indexes must have at least one Column designated  If you do not select a Column for the  Index  the first column remains selected        Thedefault sort order is Ascending  If you need a descending sort order  select Descending from the  Sort Order list for the Column you want changed     Table Editor Tasks       Note Some data types  such as LO N GVARBINARY  cannot be used for an index  Columns with such  data types are not valid choices        Continue selecting columns from the list until all the segments are added     Note that a column can be selected for an index only once  Once selected  the column is removed  from thelist of choices because the column has already been designated in the index     Click File  gt  Save or  El before changing pages within Table Editor     See also Creating Indexesin PSQL Programmer s Guide  which is part of the PSQL Software  Developer s Kit  SDK       gt  To create a partial 
190. l Tab                   Parameter Description   Table Name Shows the name of the table as it appears in the database definition    Table Location Shows the physical location of the data file associated with the table    Dictionary Path Shows where the database s DDF files are located    File Version Shows the file format version of the data file    Record Length Shows the length of the data file s records    Page Size Shows the page size  in bytes  of the data file  The page size determines the maximum    number of index segments that can be defined in a table              Number or Records Shows the number of records currently contained in the data file    Number of Indexes Shows the number of indexes defined for the table    Number of Duplicate Pointers Shows the number of linked duplicate indexes that can be added     Ptrs    Number of Unused Pages Shows the number of pre allocated pages available  If pre allocation is enabled  the    MicroKernel pre allocates a specified number of pages when it creates the data file  Pre   allocation guarantees that disk space for the data file is available when the MicroKernel  needs it           72       Tables    Table11 TableProperties on General Tab continued       Parameter    Description       Variable Records    Variable Record Blank Truncation    Shows whether the data file contains variable length records     Shows whether blank truncation is enabled  If it is  the MicroKernel truncates the blanks in  variable length records  Bl
191. l errors  BDU exits because it  cannot perform error recovery  For example  a missing delimited data file is a critical error     With recoverableerrors  BDU skipstheerror and continues processing  Theutility keeps a count of such  skipped errors and exits when it reaches a user specified threshold  By default  the threshold is set to  Zero     187    Command Line Interface Utilities    Constraints  Thefollowing constraints apply to loading data with BDU        Constraint    Discussion       Any Referential Integrity  RI  error is  considered an RI violation    Row is rejected       Any unique or primary key violations    Row is rejected       No value specified for a non NULL column     Row is rejected regardless of column s default value       No value specified for a nullable column     NULL inserted regardless of column s default value       Table into which data is being loaded  contains insert triggers    BDU returns an error and does not attempt to load the table  Drop the insert  triggers on the table then re run BDU       Table into which data is being loaded  contains CLOB or BLOB columns  relational  data types LONGVARCHAR   NLONGVARCHAR  or LONGVARBINARY     BDU does not attempt to load the table and returns the message    The target  table contains longvarchar  nlongvarchar  or longvarbinary data types  These  data types are not supported           Order of rows    BDU treats the delimited data file as unordered  The original order of rows may  not be preserved  
192. l statements in Outline view  right click on the root node then click Execute All  Statements     To execute one or more statements  click on the desired statement s      Note that you can select multiple statement by using Ctrl click  The statements do not have to be  contiguous     If multiple statements are selected  right click on one of the selected statements  then click Execute  Selected Statements     If a single statement is selected  perform one of the following actions       Right click on the statement  then click Executein Grid or Executein Text   e Press F9 or Shift F9       Click EN or E     Note SQL Editor automatically uses the Text view for the results of SQL statements that are not  SELECT statements  Only SELECT statements use the Grid           163    SQL Editor    Grid Tasks     gt  To change data within the Grid  1 Click the Grid cell that contains the value you want to change      gt        Tip By default  the entire contents becomes selected when you click the cell  Press Delete or  Backspace to deletethe entire contents of the cell        2 Changethe data in the cell   3  Movethecursor outside of the cell  for instance  press Tab or click outside of the cell    y  Caution M oving the cursor from the cell automatically saves the data changes to physical storage   You cannot explicitly save the changes made to the cell         gt  To add rows of data to the Grid  4 Click Ey on the Grid     TheAdd Rows dialog appears  For example  the following image sh
193. le or a table has been deleted outside of PCC while PCC is  currently running     You have three options when exporting a table schema   a Includean IN DICTIONARY clause with a USING clause in the statement    a Include only the USING clause in the statement      Omit both theIN DICTIONARY clause and the USING clause in the statement  a    plain     statement     IN DICTIONARY Clause    TheIN DICTIONARY clause instructs the database engine to modify only the DDFs  which leaves the  underlying physical data unchanged  Normally  PSQL keeps DDFs and data files synchronized  but this  clause allows you to force table dictionary definitions to match an existing data file     Theclause can be useful when you want to create a definition in thedictionary to match an existing data  file Another common useis if you want to duplicate an existing database  You export all the statements  from one database  create a new database and then run the exported script against the new database     If the SQL script containsIN DICTIONARY clauses  note that the data file must already exist when you  run the SQL script in SQL Editor     ThelN DICTIONARY clause is always paired with aU SING clause   An exported statement looks similar to the following        CREATE TABLE  Course  IN DICTIONARY USING  Course mkd                 Name  CHAR 7  NOT NULL CASE          Description  CHAR 50  CASE     Credit Hours  USMALLINT    Dept Name  CHAR 20  NOT NULL CASE                            CREATE UNIQUE INDEX  
194. lein use  While data files are in Continuous Operations mode  they are not  modified  and special delta files store the results of any database operations  After the backup is  complete  the data files must be removed from Continuous Operations mode  at which timethechanges  stored in the delta files are rolled into the live files     238    Frequently Asked Questions    If the server goes down while files are in continuous operations mode  the next time the data file is  accessed  the database engine detects the existing delta file and rollsin the changes at that time     You can put data files into Continuous Operations mode by using the BUTIL  STARTBU command or  Maintenance utility described in Advanced Operations Guide     239    Basic Troubleshooting    240    
195. llows you to run  Structured Query Language  SQL  statements against a PSQL database  With SQL statements  you may  retrieve  create  change  or delete data in a database provided you have the proper database permissions  to perform these actions     TheSQL statements that you may use with SQL Editor are documented in SQL Engine Reference  See  especially Grammar Statements     Figure22 SQL Editor                                           TgPervasive SOL  x    Outline   3  El   3 Pervasive  SQL AP  SELECT   FROM  Room     la   S  Room  Ic Local Client 3 SELECT   FROM  Room   E Microkemel Router  EEF Services      33 Pervasive  SQL  relat     33 Pervasive  SQL  tran    5 0 Engines  E tm    E e Databases  a  CHECKID  m  DBASES  H 8 DEFAULTDI  5  DEMODATA  3  Tables                         E Bilin   E Clas   Cour J  E 2 Grid  amp    Text E    o  E  Enc       t    El Fact Room   E Pers    Building Name   gt  Number  Capac     E Roo     Roscart Building 299   E Stuc Roscart Building 205       y  Caution Backup all your data definition files  DDFs  and data files before you perform functions  through SQL Editor  Thistool gives you the ability to modify your database table definitions and  data  You could inadvertently change your filesin an irreversible manner  Full recovery is possible if  you have performed a backup        Statement Separators    SQL Editor requires a way to differentiate where one statement ends and another begins  The way to  differentiate statements isto place
196. lumns within a table  The  table may be one newly created or an existing table that you want to edit     To modify tables with Table Editor  you must have full administrator rights on the machine on which  the database engine is running even if you are a member of the Pervasive Admin group  See Granting  Administrative Rights for the Database Engine and Database Security in Advanced O perations Guide       x  Caution Backup all your data definition files  DDFs  and data files before you perform functions  through Table Editor  This tool gives you the ability to modify your database table definitions and  data  If you inadvertently set the options incorrectly or enter incorrect data  you could change your  files in an irreversible manner  Full recovery is possible if you have performed a backup        Table Editor Pages   Table Editor contains the following pages that you use as work areas     Columns     Indexes     Foreign Keys   a SQL View    You select a page by clicking its page name tab        Note Save your changes before switching pages        Columns Page    TheColumns page lets you add  delete  modify columns  and set primary keys  See Columns Page for a  description of the areas on the Columns page  See Columns Tasks for the tasks that you perform on the    page     122    Table Editor Concepts    Data Types    Refer to PSQL Supported Data Types in SQL Engine Reference for a list of the data types supported by  the database engine  You may use any data types listed 
197. lution  Double check the spelling of the user name and the password  M ake sure the user and  password have been set up on the remote server operating system     Inspect the user s account information on the server  M ake sure the operating system is not expecting  the user s password to be changed at the next logon  M ake sure the user is not also a member of a group  that has restricted permissions     For Windows 32 bit platforms  besurethat the user is set up asa local user on the system  not a network  user  Network users have a domain name and a back slash preceding the user name  such as  BOSTON GILBERT  Besure that the user who is a member of the Administrators group or   Pervasive Admin group is alocal user     Unknown configuration properties    Itis possible  but unlikely  that PCC may retrieveconfiguration properties from the databaseenginethat  are invalid  Please contact PSQL Customer Support to report such error conditions     227    Basic Troubleshooting       Frequently Asked Questions    This section answers some of the questions that customers frequently ask     Installation     Will   lose my data files if   uninstall my existing version of the product  or install a new version   m Whydol not seein PCC PSQL Explorer the    plug in    product that   just installed or upgraded   a Whattypeof client install should   do        How can   besure what service pack level of client   am running       IsPSQL supported on a Terminal Server      Can  install PSQL in a
198. ly       d  Click OK to save the changes   Click Next to start the test   PSA runs a series of tests and displays the results     If the test succeeds  PSA informs you that all test messages were successfully transmitted  If the test  fails  PSA lists the issues along with tips on how to resolvethem  Thetips are also written to the PSA  logfile     Click Next   Click Finish if you are finished using PSA  or click View Log File to view the log     To test the MicroKernel  transactional  Engine   Start PSA and click Next    On the Options dialog  click Test active installation  if it is not already selected    Click Test transactional engine  if it is not already selected      This test runs a series of transactional operations to simulate your client requester interacting with  the database engine     Click Next     Providea path nameto the samples directory on the machine running the database engine  The  default path should be correct if the database engineis running on thelocal machine  You can type  a path  or browse to one if you click        Select the operations you want to perform for the M icroKernel Engine  by default  all are selected      Create Data File  write access required      Read Data File     Update Data  write access required      Insert Data  write access required    Click Next     9    PSA Tasks    PSA performs the tests and displays the results  A check mark indicates a test succeeds and an  x   indicates a test fails     If all of the tests succeed  y
199. ly interpreted by the database engine     The default code page is    server default     meaning the operating system code page on the server where  the database engineis running  Thelink    Change code page    provides additional information about the  setting and lets you select a specific code page     PCC Connection Encoding    PCC is  itself  a client application to the database engine  Asa client  PCC lets you specify the code page   the encoding  to use for each database session when PCC reads and inserts metadata and data  The  default for an existing database is to use the encoding of the machine where PCC isrunning  Thisisthe  legacy behavior of PCC  The default for a new database is to use automatic translation     The following explains the interaction between the settings for    PCC connection encoding    and     Database code page        PCC Connection Encoding Set to a PCC Connection Encoding Set to  Automatic Translation   Specific Encoding       PCC ignores Database Code Page and   PCC and the database automatically establish compatible encoding     uses the encoding specified to read and  insert data and metadata  The database metadata and data are translated from the encoding specified for    Database Code Page to the encoding used on the system where PCC is   This is the legacy behavior of PCC   running                 Note    PCC connection encoding    applies only to PCC  It has no affect on other client applications        When a database has OEM charac
200. m  a  lt key gt     c  key   force     da  lt key gt     g  lt key gt  lt filename gt       h    i  key     n  key     s  lt servername gt     t    u  lt usename gt     p  lt password gt    w64clilcadm  a  lt key gt     c  key   force     d  lt key gt     g  lt key gt  lt filename gt     h    i  key     n  key      s  lt servename gt     t    u  lt usename gt     p  lt password gt    cliadm64  a  lt key gt     c  key   force     d  lt key gt     g  lt key gt  lt filename gt       h    i  key     n  key     s  lt servername gt     t    u  lt usename gt     p  lt password gt    Options    For a complete discussion of the command line options  see License Administrator CLI Syntax   See Also    licgetauth  License Administration documents License Administration and the associated utilities in detail     196    Command Line Interface Utility Reference    clipaadm    Description    The clipaadm utility allows you to authorize PSQL viathetelephone  in the event that it is not possible  to authorize keys online  remotely  or offline     With this utility  options are not passed but instead  responses are given to prompts the utility displays  in order to gather information required to complete product telephone authorization   Synopsis    clipaadm    Options    This section detailsthe prompts displayed and information needed to completetelephone  authorization     1  Pleas nter the 30 character Enter the product key you want to authorize   product key        2  Repeat the authorizati
201. m the list until all the segments are added     Note that a column can be selected for an index only once  Once selected  the column is removed  from thelist of choices because the column has already been designated in the index     Click File  gt  Save or  El before changing pages within Table Editor     See also Creating Indexesin PSQL Programmer s Guide  which is part of the PSQL Software  Developer s Kit  SDK      137    Table Editor     gt     On    To create a unique index  ly the database engine can add an index to an IDENTITY or SMALLIDENTITY column  However     you can includean IDENTITY or SMALLIDENTITY column as part of a multiple segment index     Table Editor permits you to include an IDENTITY or aSMALLIDENTITY column in the Indexes list if  you have not saved the table  However  the DBM S returns an error when you attempt to save the table   After you deletethe  DENTITY or SMALLIDENTITY column from thelist  you may then save the table     1    y a    5           138    Ensure that the    Indexes    page of Table Editor is active  If required  perform the steps for To work  with indexes     Click Add   The New Index dialog displays   Type the name of the new index and click OK        Tip For a list of database object lengths and invalid characters  see Identifier Restrictions by  Identifier Type in Advanced Operations Guide        Thenew index appears in the Indexes list and the Index Segment Details display        Note New indexes are created by default as Norma
202. ment to apply     Click OK        Note Select the Set selected database as default for this session option to use the selected database  whenever you open anew SQL Editor tab  If you leave this option unselected  you will be prompted  to select a database each time you open anew SQL Editor tab     To unselect the default database    Access the Select Database dialog by clicking g4 and unselect the Set selected database as default  for this session option    or   Click Windows  gt  Preferences then click the General node  Unselect Do not prompt for new    159    SQL Editor    database each time a SQL document is opened     Theselected database is not maintained across PCC sessions  If you closeand reopen PCC  you will  have to select a new default database context         gt  To identify editor settings for SQL Editor  1 Ensure that the cursor is positioned in SQL Editor   2 Observe the information blocks along the bottom of the PCC window        O    5E Outine 53       S  SqlDoc3                    tmentDEMODATA          Block   Meaning       1 Identifies whether SQL Editor accepts character input  Writable         2 Indicates whether the editor is in insert mode or overwrite mode for character input  The Insert key toggles the mode   Note that the cursor changes shape for each mode        3 Indicates the row and column at which the cursor is positioned  The first value represents the row  the second the  column  In the image above  the cursor is positioned on the first row a
203. mission   A check mark indicates that the permission applies   Click OK     To assign permissions for a group or user using SQL   In the PCC File menu  click New  gt  SQL Document  or click   in the toolbar    The Select D atabase dialog box appears    Expand the nodes for the desired database    Click OK    In SQL Editor  create the desired statement for the group or user    In SQL Engine Reference  see the following       GRANT    REVOKE    SET PASSWORD    Click SQL  gt  Executein Text  or click   in the toolbar      Configuration       Configuration  Configuration is the process by which you provide settings for database engines and clients  You can  specify configuration settings with PCC for database engines and the local client     In PCC  the configuration settings are properties of the engine or client  In Advanced Operations Guide   see To access configuration settings in PCC for an engine and To access configuration settings in PCC  for alocal client     In addition  refer to the following sections in Advanced Operations Guide for a discussion of  configuration settings that can be configured through PCC       Services Configuration Parameters    Server Configuration Parameters    Windows Client Configuration Parameters    89    Using PSQL Control Center       Dialogs for File Open and File Save    By default  PCC now usesits own dialogs for FileO pen and File Save  and File Save As   The new dialogs  aretitled    Open SQL Document    and    Save SQL Document     re
204. mote Request is selected     You can now rule out the possibility the server is not accepting remote requests   Note  If your application uses pure Btrieve access only  without ODBC  then skip this step     If everything checks out so far  but you still cannot get to the data you want to access  make sure a  server DSN has been set up for your target data  Using PCC  expand the Databases node for that  server and inspect the databases that are present  M ake sure one of the databases represents the data  you want to access  If so  then a server DSN has been created for your data     If you do not find the data you want to access  but you know it ison the server  then most likely you  need to set up a DSN for the given data  You must have administrative rights on the server  or be a  member of the Pervasive Admin group  to do so     Follow the instructions in Setting Up ODBC Database Access to set up a DSN for existing data files   You can now rule out the server DSN as the source of the problem   Note  If your application uses pure Btrieve access only  without ODBC  then skip this step     If you have performed all the steps above and you still cannot get to your data  the next possibility  islack of a local client DSN for the remote data     PCC can access remote server DSN s using connections without client DSNs  M any desktop  applications  such as M   crosoft Excel and M icrosoft Access  cannot do this  You must create a client  DSN on your local computer to provide acces
205. mple  if you create a new view  anew SQL Editor contains a tab named     View_1     After you save the object with a name of your choice  the tab reflects the saved name     Modify the skeletal SQL statement for the common object        Tip Hover the mouse cursor on the statement to obtain a tool tip on the syntax  which also includes  an example        Click File  gt  Save or  H      To modify a common SQL object    In PCC PSQL Explorer  click the database in thelist for which you want to modify thecommon SQL  object     Expand the node for the object  function  stored procedures  user defined functions  or triggers   that you want to modify     Double click the object that you want to modify or right click the object then click Edit    A new SQL Editor is opened that contains a tab  Thetab name reflects the name by which you saved  the object    To delete a common SQL object    In PCC PSQL Explorer  click the database in thelist for which you want to delete the common SQL  object     Expand the node for the object  function  stored procedures  user defined functions  or triggers   that you want to delete     Click the object that you want to delete  then perform one of the following actions     e     Right click  then click Delete     Press Delete     Click Hg on PSQL Explorer     Note that you can select multiple objects for deletion by using Ctrl click or Shift click     chapter    PSQL System Analyzer  PSA     7                Usage Information for the Diagnostic Utility
206. ng  a   Aes  EH Class Billing  E ae Student ID Transaction Number Log Amount Owed    rl ee 100062607 1 1996 03 28 16 38 52 000 PM azo    Fl Faculty 100285859 1 1996 03 28 16 38 52 000 PM 1500 00  FR Person 100371731 1 1996 03 28 16 38 52 000 PM 1875 00  E Room 100822381 1 1996 03 28 16 38 52 000 PM 1500 00  E Student 101042707 1 1996 03 28 16 38 52 000 PM 3750 00  E Tuition 101369010 1 1996 03 28 16 38 52 000 PM 4500 00      Views        101581226 1 1996 03 28 16 38 52 000 PM 5100 00          m r 4 T                      Figure18 PSQL Control Center on Linux Platforms    File Edit Tools SQL Window Help          Bajo 2200 4374  PaPervasive PSQL  5      O  Spilling X A   52 Outline X la  Local Client    select   from    Billing      Y Engines    Y H thes4rw  anonymous   Y Databases  b  DEFAULTDB  Y  DEMODATA  Master                                                                                   Y Tables   2  Billing kal Grid 2 ERA  class Billing  Course Student_ID   Transaction Number Log  Amount Owed   2  Dept 100062607 1 3 28 1996 4 38 52 PM 2125 00  enrolls 100285859 1 3 28 1996 4 38 52 PM 1500 00  Faculty 100371731 1 3 28 1996 4 38 52 PM 1875 00   Person 100822381 1 3 28 1996 4 38 52 PM 1500 00  ElRoom 101042707 1 3 28 1996 4 38 52 PM 3750 00  student 101369010 1 3 28 1996 4 38 52 PM 4500 00  EBTuition 101581226 1 3 28 1996 4 38 52 PM 5100 00   gt   Views 101811551 1 3 28 1996 4 38 52 PM 3750 00  a    T 1 anonnnr 4 30 01 mes soon on                                        
207. ns about miscellaneous topics     I dumped Btrieve records to a file and now   can   t read the file  What happened     If you usetheBtrieveM aintenanceUtility to save dump therecords  theresulting filecontains the binary  image of each record  Unless the record consists entirely of character data  it may not be readable to the  human eye     The only way that PSQL can dump a record in ASCII readable format  is by reading the DDFs to get a  description of thetotal contents of therecord  Btrieveonly hastherecord length  the data typeof indexes    237    Basic Troubleshooting    and length of the indexes  Btrieve does not have information on how to interpret the entire contents of  the record    How do I run PSQL in trace mode    Server    You must have administrator privileges on the machine wherethe engine is located that you want to run  in debug mode     4 Using PCC  right click on the desired Server engine then click Properties   2 Click Debugging and set the value for Trace Operation to On   3 Click OK   You do not need to restart the engine   See also Trace Operation in Advanced O perations Guide        Note After tracing operations  you should turn off Trace O peration  making sure to click Edit  gt   Apply when finished  You will notice slower performance if you run PSQL in trace mode        Windows Client    Run thePSA network connectivity tests to verify network connectivity  See Test Active Installation Tasks   Also refer to the Knowledge Base  available at the PSQL
208. nsensitive  NOW   and now   are equivalent  The parentheses are required  That is  NOW is  invalid but NOW   is valid           Note You can also omit the seconds for a time data type provided that you include    AM    or    PM      For example  10 30 AM   sa valid entry  Time defaults to    AM     if you omit    AM    or    PM     For  example  10 30 00 is entered as 10 30 00 AM         To refresh data in the Grid  Click G9 on theGrid   A refresh re executes the statement last executed in SQL Editor and sends the results to the Grid     To copy data from the Grid  Perform on of the following actions       To select the data for an individual cell  click in the cell  then click    3  or right click and click  Copy      By default  the entire content of the cell is selected     To select an entire row  right click on any cell then click Copy Text or click         You may also select multiple rows  To select multiple rows  press and hold down the Shift or Ctrl  key  then click a cell in each desired row        Note When you copy an entire row or multiple rows  the rows are pasted in the same layout as they  appear in the Text window view  You can specify the number of characters between the pasted  columns  Click Window then expand the PSQL nodein the Preferences tree  Click Text Output in  the tree and set the desired value for Number of spaces between columns     SQL Editor Tasks    Text Window Tasks    To clear results from Text view  Click oon the Text view     To select an
209. nt DSN on each client machine   WhilePSQL tools can access remote databases without a client DSN present on the client machine   ODBC based applications such as M icrosoft Excel and M icrosoft Access cannot do so  You must  create a client DSN on each client computer that needs to access network databases from local  ODBC applications     Internal Database Name    The method used by PSQL to identify a database is an internal Database Name  DBNAM E   If you are  using ODBC to access the database  you need to create a Data Source Name  DSN  entry that refers to  one DBNAME  You may set up more than one DSN that refers to the same DBNAM E  If the physical  location of the data files on the server is changed  only the DBNAM E needs to be updated  All DSNs  remain unchanged     Applications Using the MicroKernel Engine    PSQL databases that are accessed only through the M icroKernel Enginedo not need DSN s  H owever  the  database tables are not visiblein PCC nor can they be manipulated using PCC  To view table data with    27    Using PSQL    PCC in readable form  the table must be defined in the data dictionary files  DDFs   See DDF Builder  User s Guide     Also  databases created with the PSQL Java utilities do not requireDSNs  ThePSQL Control Center  for  example  uses  DBC not ODBC     28    Setting up Database Access with PCC       Setting up Database Access with PCC    You must know the name of the server where the database is located  If the database already has a  DBNAM
210. nt Details     unique O Partial OvNormal    Allow Modifications    144    4    Table Editor Tasks    A check mark in the box indicates that the index value can be modified  Lack of a check mark  indicates that the index value cannot be modified              Option State Meaning  Values can be modified  O Values cannot be modified  Ol Modifiable does not apply             The default for all SQL data types is that the index column is modifiable   Click File  gt  Save or  El before changing pages within Table Editor     Foreign Keys Tasks     gt  To add a foreign key    Note that at least one table in the database must have a primary key or you cannot add a foreign key     1    2  3    Va    4    5    Ensure that the    Foreign Keys    page of Table Editor is active  If required  perform the steps for To  work with foreign keys     Click Add   Type the name that you want for the new foreign key        Tip For alist of database object lengths and invalid characters  see Identifier Restrictions by  Identifier Type in Advanced Operations Guide        Click OK   Thenew foreign key appears in the Foreign Keys list and the Foreign Keys D etails display     Foreign Key Editor                                                      Foreign Keys   Foreign Key Details  To mplkey Add     Select Primary Table Fl  Delete  Primary Table Fields Foreign Table Fields  r Referential Integrity Rules      Delete Restrict  O Delete Cascade  To Select primary key table          Click y  for    Select P
211. nts     Security    Security contains property settings  tabbed areas  for Database Security and Btrieve Security  See the  chapter PSQL Security for a complete discussion of security     65    Using PSQL Control Center       New Database GUI Reference    The following image shows the dialog with which you create a new database  The table below the image    describes the GUI objects   See also To create a new database    Click on an area of the image for which you want more information     Figure20 Create New Database Dialog    O l    Database Options  CO Bound  Create dictionary files  if they do not exist   O Relational integrity enforced   O Long metadata  V2 metadata     Database Name     Location                 Database code page  Server Default Change code page    DSN Options  O Create 32 bit Engine DSN    Table10 CreateNew DatabaseGUI Elements                      66          Element Description Related Material  Database The name for the database that you want to appear in the database listing in PCC    Identifiers and Object  Name Names  Note  The database name cannot be the same as an existing data source name   DSN    back to Figure 20   Location This location must be on the same server to which you are connected  and where   Dictionary Location and  the database engine is running   Location must be formatted as though you are   Data Directories  working directly at the server machine    back to Figure 20   Bound Indicates whether or not the database is bound  Bin
212. nts to connect to X   Server     Now you can switch to user psq l or root     Also  sometimes the display environment variables needs to be set  As  user psql or root  type the following command at a console window     export DISPLAY  0 0    or       export DISPLAY localhost 0 0       You want to view the error log file for PCC or  redirect the errors to the console window     By default  the log file of PCC errors is located in a subdirectory of the  user s home directory  the subdirectory is dir _pcc workspace    metadata   For troubleshooting  you may find it more convenient to  redirect the errors to the console window     To redirect errors to the console window  use the     consoleLog    option  when starting PCC     pcc  consoleLog       You receive the following error message    Unable to connect to database engine  Make  sure the target machine is accessible and an  engine is running on the target machine        The context of this error occurs if you attempt to administer the local server     To administer the local server  you must be a member of the pvsw group  or be the root user        You receive the error     GTK IM Module SCIM   Cannot connect to Panel     then trying to run PCC  as a user other than root           On some Linux operating systems  it is necessary to specify the  environment variable GTK_IM_MODULE     To resolve this problem  before starting PCC  run the following command  at the console window   export GTK_IM MODULE scim bridge             Si
213. o change file encoding and to set a default encoding  In addition  the  Preview inset shows a preview of the data based on thefile name  file encoding and the options selected   For example  the following image shows the    class sdf    table provided with PSQL about to beimported   Encoding is set to    windows 1252    and Preview shows what the file data looks like based on that  encoding with a COM MA delimiter and no column names in the first row        Import Data   Class     gt     Enter file name and provide information about the import data  Import From   PSQL Demodata restore class sdf   Browse         First row contains column names    Delimiter   COMMA      Encoding   windows 1252 y Change default encoding  Preview    160   PHY 204   001   30   1995 06 05   11 00 00   13 50 00   Gimlett Building       106   377319605    161   PHY 305   001   25   1995 06 06   08 00 00   10 50 00   Gimlett Building    If you import afilewith aBOM  theBOM isrecognized and stripped off during theimport  In addition   the file is imported with the encoding specified by the BOM regardless of what encoding you specify on  the dialog  Thatis  afile BOM overrides the Encoding selection     Note that you can access the standard operating system dialog for file selection by clicking Browse   See also Importing Data with Import Data Wizard in PSQL User s Guide     Export Data Dialog    Export Data now allows you to changefile encoding and to set a default encoding  Notethat theExample  inset 
214. o deauthorize a  database license  If not  select a different server as described in To Select a Server for License  Administration     Click a Product name in the License Information list     You can select multiple keys by holding down the Shift or Control keys and clicking the desired  product names     Click the button to deauthorize the key        Note You cannot deauthorize a key in a failed validation state  Either rectify the issue before  deauthorizing or call PSQL support for assistance        Tip When you deauthorize a product key  all increase keys for user count  session count  or data in  use associated with that product key are automatically deauthorized as well         gt  To Repair a Key    Ya    3       i Tip After you have applied a product key on a machine  changes to the hardware configuration can    cause a key to fail validation or become disabled  requiring a repair  To avoid the need for a repair   deauthorize the key before changing the hardware configuration and authorize the key again after  the new configuration is complete     Ensure that the server name in the title bar is the server for which you want to repair a key  If not   select a different server as described in To Select a Server for License Administration     In the License Information list  click the Product name of the product with the key you want to  repair   Click Repair     113    Licen    4     gt     1    2     gt     1    2     gt     1    2    114    se Administration    In th
215. o execute statements from the Outline window view  The Outline view allows you to select  multiple statements to execute  with Ctrl click   For example  if your Outline view shows three  statements asin the figure above  you may choose to execute statements 1 and 3 but not 2  See To run  SQL statements in Outline view     154    Working with Common SQL Objects       Working with Common SQL Objects    Some SQL objects are dealt with commonly  Asa conveniencefor you  PCC shows the following objects  in PSQL Explorer and provides commands for their creation and editing    a Triggers     Stored procedures   a User defined functions   m Views   When you usecommandsto create one of these objects  SQL Editor provides SQL syntax for that object    to help you get started  For example  if you chooseto create a new view  SQL Editor containsthe syntax  CREATE VIEW  lt viewname gt  AS                    Ya       Tip You can hover the mouse cursor on a SQL statement to obtain a tool tip on the syntax  which  also includes an example        SQL Editor provides the newly created object with a default name of object_n  where object isthe name  of the object and n is an integer that starts with one and increments by one  For example  if you create a  new view  SQL Editor contains anew tab named    View_ 1     After you savethe object with anameof your  choice  the tab reflects the saved name     The following table defines the common objects and refers you to SQL Engine Reference for addition
216. oding allows you to work more easily with files containing wide  character data  This setting provides the following features     An option to usethePCC dialogs for File Open and File Save    A list of encodings from which to select the default to be used for the following PCC actions      PCC File Open     PCC File Save   e Import Data     Export Data     Export Schema    To set a preference to use PCC dialogs for File Open and File Save  In PCC  click Window  gt  Preferences then File Encoding     Make sure that the option    Do not prompt for encoding during FileO pen and File Save    is not  selected  By default  the option is not selected     Click OK     To set a preference for default encoding  In PCC  click Window  gt  Preferences then File Encoding   Select an encoding from the Default encoding list and click OK     Table9 Default Encoding Choices       Encoding Discussion        system code page  The default is the system code page currently in use  For example  on Windows platforms in English    you commonly see    windows 1252           Big5 Big5 is a Chinese character encoding method used for traditional Chinese characters        EUC_JP Extended Unix Code  EUC _JP is a variable width encoding used to represent the elements of three    Japanese character set standards  JIS X 0208  JIS X 0212  and JIS X 0201        Shift_JIS Shift_JIS  Japanese Industrial Standards  is a character encoding for the Japanese language           UTF 8 UTF  Universal Character Set Trans
217. of PSQL Control Center                         Working with Task Right click For information  see  Triggers  Create A database under Databases   To create a common SQL  Stored Procedures  node  or object   User defined Functions  a trigger      Views stored procedure  See also Triggers  Stored  user defined function  or Procedures  User defined  view Functions  and Views  This task can also be  performed from any object  subordinate to the Engines  node   Edit A database under Databases   To modify a common SQL  node  or object  a trigger   stored procedure  See also Triggers  Stored  user defined function  or Procedures  User defined  view Functions  and Views  This task can also be  performed from any object  subordinate to the Engines  node   Delete A database under Databases   To delete a common SQL  node  or object  a trigger   stored procedure  See also Triggers  Stored  user defined function  or Procedures  User defined  view Functions  and Views  This task can also be  performed from any object  subordinate to the Engines  node   SQL Editor    SQL Editor allows you to run Structured Query Language  SQL  statements against a PSQL database     See SQL Editor for a detailed discussion     Grid    The Grid window view shows in a matrix format  like a spreadsheet  the result of running SQL    statements  Each field is represented as a column and the data appears in cells within the columns  You    can change data directly in the Grid cells as well as add additional rows to
218. ols list    9 Ifyou have performed all of the above tasks with no success at accessing your data  contact PSQL  Support     PCC runs slowly or hangs when retrieving large record sets    If this problem occurs  try increasing the amount of memory availableto PCC during start up  The  amount of memory you can specify is limited by the physical memory installed on your machine  You  can specify aminimum and amaximum amount of memory  For example  to specify aminimum and  maximum of 256 megabytes  start PCC with the following command     pcc exe  vmargs  Xms256M  Xmx256M  The parameter  vmargs is required if you specify the other parameters     Theparameter  xms specifiesthe minimum amount of memory to allocateto PCC  The parameter  xmx  specifies the maximum amount of memory to allocate to PCC  If you specify the  xms parameter  you  must also specify the  xmx parameter     225    Basic Troubleshooting       Error Messages from PCC    You may receive several different messages when attempting to create or connect to databases in PCC   This section explains the likely causes for some of the most common error messages       Can t retrieve database names  You don t have access rights for the operation      Unableto connect to the specified remote server  Verify that all of the communication components  are loaded on the remote server and that there are available sessions and try again      An error was encountered while connecting to the server    Unknown configuration properties  
219. ompt for new database each time a SQL document is opened  see To set database context  for an SQL query     Select Always remove associated DSN entries to have all DSN entries for any database automatically  deleted along with the database without prompting     Clear Do not prompt for new database each time a SQL document is opened to be prompted to select  a database each time you open aSQL document in the SQL Editor  If this option is deselected  select it  to usethe most recently selected database when you open a SQL document  The selected databaseis not  maintained across PCC sessions  If you close and reopen PCC  you will have to select a new default  database context     Preferences for PCC Window Views    You can set preferences for the following PCC window views         DataGrid     Defragmenter    Monitor     SQL Editor     Table Editor  m Text     gt  To set preferences for PCC Window Views  1 InthePCC Window menu  click Preferences  and expand the PSQL node if needed     52    An Overview of PSQL Control Center    Perform one of the following actions       To set preferences for Data Grid  click Data Grid      To set preferences for Defragmenter  click D efragmenter     To set preferences for M onitor  click Server M onitor      To set preferences for SQL Editor  click SQL Editor      To set preferences for Table Editor  click Table Editor      To set preferences for Text Output  click Text Output     File Encoding Preferences    The preference setting for File Enc
220. omputer  A  local database is a database in which the data files are stored on the hard disk of the computer you are    Introducing PSQL    currently using  Local is the opposite of remote  Local can refer to either the client or the server   depending on whether you are currently seated at the server computer or a client computer     Key Concepts    Relational    Theterm relational refers to the storage of data in the form of related tables  The related tables allow  relationshipsto be created between sub sets of data     For example  you can seethat both our exampletables contain theNamecolumn  and someofthenames  are the same  Because we can cross reference the names in the Phone table with the names in the Food  table  we havethe power to ask and answer such questions as     What isthe phone number of someone  who likes steak     We may also answer such questions as     Which consumer profile purchased the most  product B after buying product A        You can see how powerful relational data access is  The Relational Engine of PSQL provides full  relational access to your data     Join    A join refers to an association between columns of related tables  Typically  a join operation is part of a  SELECT query  which is used to obtain information from related tables     Unique Benefits of PSQL    Oneunique feature of PSQL is that it allows applications to access data through either the industry   standard Relational Engine  or through the ultra high speed M icroKernel Engin
221. on      Wherecan   find information on migration from earlier product versions to PSQL v12  Where can    find migration and compatibility information       When   createatable using an existing Btrievefile  the wizard displays fewer columns than there are  in the Btrieve file  What s wrong     DEMODATA Sample Database  How do   restore DEM ODATA to its installation defaults   4 Start PCC if it is not already running   See Starting PCC on Windows      2 In PCC  click File  gt  New SQL Document or  si  See To start SQL Editor for anew SQL query    The Select Database dialog appears     229    Basic Troubleshooting    Select Database    Select the database to use with the  current editor or check  None      None           JWYNN C8256T  anonymous      9 Databases  B DEFAULTDB  E  B DOPE  B TEMPOS          3 Click DEMODATA in thelist  then click OK   SQL Editor appears as a new tab view in PCC    4 Click File gt  Open    5 Navigate to the location of the DEM ODATA sql file then click Open   For default locations of PSQL files  see Where are the PSQL files installed  in Getting Started With  PSQL    6 Click SQL  gt Execute All SQL Statements  press F10  or click Gl   DEM ODATA sql deletes the existing tables then recreates them using the installation defaults  The  restored tables are empty  no data    Any new tables that you have created as part of DEM ODATA arenot affected    7 Usethe Bulk Data Utility  BDU  to populate the tables with data  see bdu      a  Open a command prompt 
222. on at a time can cause a failed validation  You can correct what you think is the  sole condition  yet the key remains in the failed validation state  If so  refer to the PVSW LOG file for  more information  That log file contains all of the conditions causing the failed validation  See PSQL  Event Log  PVSW LOG  in Advanced Operations Guide     If the changes that caused the failed validation are due to intentional hardware upgrades performed  without first deauthorizing the key  the next step is to repair the key     Repair    License Administrator provides the functionality to perform a repair on a key that is disabled or has  failed validation  M oreover  it not only repairs the key  it automatically deauthorizes the key and then  authorizes it again on the same machine     You can perform arepair using either the graphical user interface  see License Administrator Graphical  User Interface  or the command line interface  see License Administrator Command Line Interface      If the problem is more significant than a change in hardware  for example  the machine on which a key  isinstalled no longer boots  you cannot repair the key  In that case  contact support for assistance     Increase User Count or Data In Use    Situations can arise in which you want to increase user count or data in use from theinitial amount  provided by the permanent product key  You increase the amount by authorizing an increase key   Multiple increase keys can be authorized on a product key     T
223. on request If you obtained your product key from Actian Corporation  call  code to phone support Actian Corporation support and give them the Authorization  Request Code displayed in this step     Authorization Request Code  xxxx xxxx   If you did not obtain your product key from Actian Corporation     contact the vendor or original equipment manufacturer  OEM   from whom you obtained the key  Provide the vendor or OEM  personnel the Authorization Request Code displayed in this step     XXXXTXXXXXXXX XXXX   XXXXXXXX       3  Enter the authorization key provided Enter the Authorization Key provided by PSQL Support  or by the  by support  XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX  vendor or OEM personnel  to authorize PSQL     XXXXXXXXXX    See Also  License Administration documents License Administration in detail     197    Command Line Interface Utilities    dbmaint    Description  Thedbmaint utility manages named databases        Note Thisutility can only berun by user accounts belonging to group pvsw  See Getting Started With  PSQL for information on PSQL Linux utilities and user accounts        Synopsis    dbmaint a   d   1   m   nDbname    a    b    c    i    e     ldictpath      ddatapath    ssecuritymode     add new database name a  nD bname   b    i    e     Idictpath    ddatapath     delete database name d  nD bname  list database names 1   a   The  a option displays the full information about the dbnames     modify database name security policy m  nDbname  ssecuritymode    Options   
224. on theleft side of the window that containsa list of machines  to which you are connected        Note The machines listed in your PSQL Explorer will remain between sessions  To remove a  machine  right click the machine name and click D elete        Enter the Server name where the PSQL v12 database engine resides     You need to be authenticated on the remote engine  and a dialog displays prompting you for a user  name and password     Enter the user name and password in the appropriate fields and click OK   You are now connected to the remote PSQL engine      gt  To set up a Client DSN using ODBC Administrator    1    2    3    In PCC  click Tools and select ODBC Administrator        Note Windows 64 bit operating systems contain two different executable files for ODBC  Administrator  one for 32 bit DSN sand one for 64 bit DSN s  Each ODBC Administrator lists the  system DSNs that only match its bitness  For the 64 bit PSQL Server or Workgroup  PCC contains  separate options in the Tools menu to start the 32 bit or the 64 bit ODBC Administrator  If an  ODBC Administrator is already open  Windows defaults to it  That is  if the 32 bit ODBC  Administrator is open and you attempt to start the 64 bit one  Windows displays the 32 bit version   and vice versa   This is a limitation of the Windows operating system  not PSQL        Click the System DSN tab  then Add        Note PSQL does not support File DSNs  You must use User or System DSN ss  System DSN s are  generally preferred 
225. on user tasks  The guide discusses the database  engine  PSQL utilities and other key components  the differences between Server and Workgroup  engines  and the differences between ODBC and Btrieve access  PSQL User sGuideprovides you with the  basics to work with PSQL successfully     Advanced Operations Guide    Advanced O perations Guide provides detailed information at the administrativelevel  including thesteps  to perform common procedures and several new ones  Topics include       checking database consistency     performing periodic backups     configuring network protocols and understanding network topologies    working with database security     basic configuration guidelines     configuration options reference       moving  renaming  compacting and rebuilding files    SQL Engine Reference   SQL Engine Reference gives database programmers a complete reference guide to the SQL relational  database language  It also covers SQL engine parameters and limitations    Status Codes and Messages    Status Codes and M essages documents all possible status codes and numbered messages that can be  received when using PSQL     The Status Codes Quick Reference is also included with your complete documentation set     Additional Information    You can download the product documentation  white papers  technical papers  and use the online  library at the Actian PSQL website     13    Introducing PSQL       File System Security    ThePSQL engine adheres to the file system security de
226. ons available on the server  Check MicroKernel  Communication Statistics  For Total Remote Sessions  if the Peak value and the Maximum value  are the same  then it is likely that you have run out of sessions     4 Theremote database server is not running     Solution  M ake sure that the remote database engine is running  or ask your network administrator  to do so     5 Theremote database server is not accepting client requests     Solution  Set the properties to ensurethat theremote database engineis configured to accept remote  requests  You must have administrative permission on the server  or membership in the   Pervasive Admin group  in order to do so  In PCC  right click on the server name in PSQL  Explorer  then click Properties  Click Access and ensure that the Accept Remote Request option is  selected     An error was encountered while connecting to the server    The most likely cause of this error is using the wrong operating system user name or password in an  attempt to connect to the server     Other possible causes include       Theoperating system may be expecting the user to change his her password on the first logon  This  situation occurs if  in the User M anager  you have selected the User Must Change Password at Next  Logon checkbox    a  Iftheuserisamember of another group with lesser permissions  thelesser permissions will override  the greater permissions  A user always has the most restrictive permissions of any group to which  the user belongs     So
227. oom  Office   Classroom  Classroom    Office  Office  Office  Office    Woodward Building       If execution stops because of an error  the Text window view lists the statement that was last run   Knowing the last statement run can help you troubleshoot problems     Scrolling and Positioning    Asaconvenience  the Text window view automatically scrolls to the top line of the data returned by the  last statement executed  For example  suppose that you execute the following two statements  sequentially in SQL Editor  each time sending the results to the Text window view  SELECT   FROM  Class and SELECT   FROM Billing     TheText window view automatically scrolls to the top of the data returned by SELECT   FROM Billing   the last statement executed                                         Outline Window View    The Outline window view allows you to view the SQL statements in a tree structure  The root node of  the tree is the same name as the name of the SQL Editor session to which the outline corresponds     153    SQL Editor    Figure25 Outline Window View       E Room 23 g  SELECT   FROM  Room   sels oor   SELECT Type FROM  ROOM  WHERE Type    Office     SELECT   FROM  Room    SELECT Building Name FROM  ROOM  WHERE Building Name      Holland Hall     SELECT Type FROM  ROOM       SELECT Building Name FROM  ROOM        Thenumber of words displayed in the Outline window view depends on your preferences setting  To set  preferences for SQL Editor  click SQL Editor      You can als
228. ory        dsnadd  dsn USInvoices  db DomesticOrders  host USInventory    The following example creates a deprecated  legacy style Client DSN named    bkordercint    that  references an engine DSN named    backordersrv    on a machine named    JapanSvr2    and uses automatic  encoding     dsnadd  dsn bkorderclnt  sdsn backordersrv  host JapanSvr2  translate auto  clntdsn    Thefollowing example creates a deprecated  legacy style engine DSN named    partsctlg    that connects  to a database named    partscatalog        dsnadd  dsn partsctlg  db partscatalog  engdsn    Notes    On Linux distributions  individual ODBC drivers are loaded through the driver manager UNIXODBC   Thedriver manager maintains a mapping from Data Source Names  DSN s  to the specific PSQL ODBC  drivers     Theinstallation of PSQL Server 64 bit or Client 64 bit leaves user defined  preexisting 32 bit DSN s as  is  meaning they arenot immediately accessiblefrom a 64 bit application  For new DSNs  theinstallation  of both products assigns a 32 bit and a 64 bit ODBC driver in odbcinst ini  This assignment allows a  single DSN to be used by both a 32 bit application and a 64  bit application     If you want pre existing 32 bit DSN sto be accessible to both 32 bit and 64  bit applications  you must  recreate them as DSN s that connect to a named database     ODBC and Data Source Names  DSNs     Theapplication bitness does not haveto match the bitness of the PSQL Server product  For example  the  64 bit ODBC dri
229. ote You can also access the File Encoding preference setting from the dialogs for File Open  Save  File  Import Data  Export Data  and Export Schema  Click    Change default encoding    in the dialog        Additional Utilities    Some utilities have not yet been tightly integrated within the PCC framework  However  they may still  be started from within PCC by selecting them through the Tools menu        ODBC Administrator   Separate choices for 32 bit Administrator and 64 bit Administrator on 64   bit operating systems  see DSN Setup and Connection Stringsin ODBC Guide   Notethat Windows  uses whichever ODBC Administrator is open if you try to invoke the other one  That is  if the 32 bit  ODBC Administrator is open and you attempt to start the 64 bit one  Windows displays the 32 bit  version  and vice versa   In other words  only one version of ODBC Administrator runs at a time   This is alimitation of Windows rather than PSQL       DDF Builder  see Getting Started with DDF Builder in DDF Builder User s Guide      Defragmenter  see Monitoring Data File Fragmentation in Advanced Operations Guide    m Function Executor  see Testing Btrieve Operations in Advanced Operations Guide    a License Administrator  see License Administration      Maintenance seeM anipulating Btrieve Data Files with M aintenancein Advanced O perations Guide     Monitor  see Monitoring in Advanced Operations Guide    m PSQL System Analyzer  see PSQL System Analyzer  PSA       Query Plan Viewer  see Quer
230. ou first need to find the correct location     1 Begin by looking for aWow6432N ode If it exists  edit the proxy server Registry settings in the  Pervasive Software ELS key     2 If it doesn   t  move to the Software directory and edit the proxy server Registry settings in the  Pervasive Software ELS key     After locating the correct key  use the following procedure     1 Modify the Windows Registry and add the following to the Pervasive Software ELS  key at the  correct node     String Value proxy_host  DWORD Value proxy_port  String Value proxy_userid  String Value proxy_passwd    Note  The proxy_host and proxy_port values are the only ones required by PSQL  Depending on the  configuration of your proxy server  you may also need to add proxy_userid and proxy_passwd           3  Caution Editing the Registry is an advanced procedure  If done improperly  the editing can cause  your operating system not to boot  If necessary  obtain the services of a qualified technician to  perform the editing  Actian Corporation does not accept responsibility for a damaged Registry        101    License Administration    2 AuthorizePSQL using License Administrator  See To Authorizea Key for the GUI and To Authorize  a Key for theCLl     Linux    14 Manually edit the ELS INI file to include the following     proxy_host  proxy_port  proxy_userid    proxy_passwd    Note  The proxy_host and proxy_port values are the only ones required by PSQL  Depending on the  configuration of your proxy server
231. our client requester can communicate with the database engine   Click Next   Click Finish if you are finished using PSA  or click View Log File to view the log     To test the Relational Engine   Start PSA and click Next    On the Options dialog  click Test active installation  if it is not already selected    Click Test relational engine  if it isnot already selected      This test runs a series of SQL operations to simulate your client requester interacting with the  database engine     Click Next     For Machine Name  typethenameor IP address of the machine where the engine data source name   DSN  resides  or browseto the machine  click        Thename    localhost    is valid if you are testing the local machine     For Engine DSN  typethenameof the DSN for the data source you want to test  The default   demodata  uses the DSN for the sample database installed with the database engine     Select the operations you want to perform for the Relational Engine  by default  all are selected      Create Table      Read Data     UpdateData    Insert Data  Click Next     PSA performs the tests and displays the results  A check mark indicates a test succeeds and an  x   indicates a test fails     If all of the tests succeed  your PSQL Client can communicate with the Relational Engine  Click Next     10 Click Finish if you are finished using PSA  or click View Log File to view the log     Log Files Tasks     gt  To specify a different location for the PSA log file    1  2    Start PS
232. ows the dialog for the    Billing     table that is part of the sample database DEM ODATA        Add  Student_ID UBIGINT  Transaction_Number USMALLINT Reset    Log 01 11 2005 8 52 10 AM TIMESTAMP  Amount_Owed DECIMAL  Amount_Paid DECIMAL  Registrar_ID UBIGINT  Comments CHAR  Refresh Grid on erit    2 Click in the Value cell for each Column Name and type the desired value   The value must be a data type valid for that column        Add  Student_ID 998444721 UBIGINT  Transaction_Number 1 USMALLINT Reset    Log 01 11 2005 9 04 12 AM TIMESTAMP  Amount_Owed 1652 50 DECIMAL  Amount_Paid 1152 50 DECIMAL  RegistrarID 130312616 UBIGINT  Comments Check scholarship fund for balance  CHAR  J    Refresh Grid an eri       Tip You can copy data from Grid cells and paste it into the Value cells  Click on a Grid cell then right   dick  Click Copy  Click on a Value cell on the Add Rows dialog then right click  Click Paste  Also  note that Ctrl C and Ctrl V provide the copy and paste actions  respectively        3 Click Add     164    s3    2  3    SQL Editor Tasks    The record is added to the table  Also note that the option Refresh Grid on Exit becomes enabled     If you want to add multiple records  you can change values for specific value cells then click Add  If  you want to clear all of the value cells  click Reset     Optionally  click Refresh Grid on Exit if you want the table data refreshed      Hegistrar_ID  Comments       When you close the Add Rows dialog  a refresh re executes the
233. p using PSQL Explorer  To assign permissions for a user using PSQL Explorer  To assign permissions to all users using PSQL Explorer  To assign permissions for a group or user using SQL          Encryption Tasks Apply to data encryption    See Data Encryption in Advanced Operations Guide           General Tasks     gt          4     gt     To log out from and log in to a database       Note As the M aster user  logging in as another user can aid you in testing the more restrictive  permissions you have assigned this user     Right click on the database namein the PCC PSQL Explorer then click Logout  name      Name reflects the name of the user currently logged in to the database  If the database does not have  security enabled  nameis Master  Name may also be M aster if the current user is logged in as M aster     Any nodes expanded for the database are collapsed   Right click the database name    Click Login    Type the user name and password  then click OK     To turn on security using PSQL Explorer    If the database resides on a remote machine  you must provide a user name and password of an  administrator or of amember of the Pervasive Admin group for the remote machine  The user name  and password isnot required if the database resides on thelocal machineto which you arelogged in  and  the local machine is not running Terminal Services      Turning on security prevents all users from accessing the database unless they login to it using a valid   database user name and pa
234. ple inset does not contain a preview of the literal schema  Rather  it shows an example of what the  exported table schema looks like given the selected options  The Exampleinset is updated when afileis  chosen and when encoding or either option is changed     For example  in the following image  the dialog is set to export the schema for the    Faculty    table  provided with the DEM ODATA sample database  Note that the option    add    IN DICTIONARY    clause  to CREATE statements    is selected and that the Example inset contains an IN DICTIONARY clause     Export Table Schema    Enter file name to export CREATE TABLE statements       Export To    C  users public faculty_schema_export sq    Browse          V  add  IN DICTIONARY  clause to CREATE statements     add  USING  clause to CREATE statements    Encoding    windows 1252    Change default encoding    Example     CREATE TABLE  Faculty  IN DICTIONARY USING  Faculty mkd      Column1 Name  INTEGER NOT NULL    Column2Name  CHAR 50  NOT NULL         Notethat you can access the standard operating system dialog for file selection by clicking Browse     94    Wide Character Data Support for Import Data  Export Data  and Export Schema    See also Exporting a Schema in PSQL User s Guide    95    UsingPSQL Control Center    96    License Administration E       chapter                License M odels and Working with Keys    This chapter covers the following topics     a License Administration Concepts   a License Administrator Gr
235. pplicationsUsingtheMicroKerne Engine         aaa ee 27    Setting up Database Access with PCC 1    ee 29  Setting Up DatabaseAccessonWindowS     1    0 ee es 29  Setting Up Database Access on a Linux Server     o    o    e  es 30  Setting Up Client Access from aWindowsClient      0    0    eee ee ees 31  Setting Up aClientDSN onaLinuxClientt      0    ee es 33   AccessingDataonaRemoteEngineUsingPCC    1    es 34   Accessing Data via ODBC From Other Applications         0 0    cee ees 36  BeforeYOUBEGIN    es 36  AccessingDataUsingMicrosoftExcel   2    o    2    e              36  Accessing Data Using Microsoft ACCESS           o ooo    ee 37   DAGINGIDSNS a eosi aana A dha ee 41   3 Using PSQL Control Center                        ee          43   A Tour of PSQL Control Center   An Overview of PSQL Control Center   aoaaa a o    e                44  NristallinG  PCC  lt A des EO ae oes OE e 45  StartingPCC ON WiNdOWS o    o    o    o    45  Starting PEC ON Linux   as nee As la la tna za dale A 45  Situations Requiring That You Clear PCC Cache    aoaaa aaa ees 46  Editors and Views Within PCC  oaaae ooo                   47  PNC o ar e A A Ba eae ae Band areas Sd waa BOs 52  Additional Utilities    ee 54  External 00534 rs pte hee ahh be Soe hd ead pd ek Wh ed ty ho a ah RIS pu ded 55   Services on Windows Servers    0  es 56  Services  Prop  rties  zpi a aa E ER GARA aoe eed are SES ek ae EY AAE 56   DatabaseEnginsS   2    ee 57  Database Engine Properties       aaa a 58   Cap
236. pports only  named databases  The 64 bit Client Interface can connect to alocal named database  thus replacing the  function of the Engine DSN  or to aremote named database  Connection to an Engine DSN isnot  supported        Note Because 32 bit Engine DSN shave been deprecated  Actian Corporation recommends that new  or revised 32 bit applications connect to a named database through a Client DSN or usea DSN  less  connection by specifying    Pervasive ODBC Client Interface     See To set up a Client DSN using  ODBC Administrator        mo    In PCC  click Tools then ODBC Administrator   Click the System DSN tab  then Add    In thelist  click Pervasive OD BC Engine Interface   Click Finish     hh OO N    29    Using PSQL    8  9    The Pervasive ODBC Engine Interface dialog displays    Type a Data Source Name    For Database Name  select in the list for which you want to create the Engine DSN   Click Advanced if you want to specify advanced connection attributes    See Advanced Connection Attributes in ODBC Guide   Click OK    Click OK     Setting Up Database Access on a Linux Server     gt     To set up a named database on a Linux server    Database names are created in Linux by using the dbmaint utility at the server  For a complete  description of domaint  see domaint or read the domaint man page     30       Note This utility can only berun by user accounts belonging to group pvsw  See PSQL Account  Management on Linux in Getting Started With PSQL        To create an empt
237. property nodes     Code Page   Directories   General   Relational Constraints  Security    Code Page    This section details the property settings for Code Page     y    62    Database Code Page  PCC Connection Encoding       Note The database engine does not validatethe encoding of the data and metadata that an  application insertsinto a database  The engine assumes that all text data was translated by the client  to the encoding of the server or the client database code page  as explained in Database Code Page  and Client Encoding in Advanced O perations Guide       Databases    Database Code Page    This property specifies the encoding to use for metadata and is stored in DBNAM ES cfg  Note that this  property applies to the database  which means that it potentially affects all client applications that  exchange data with that database  A compatible encoding must be established between the PSQL  database engine and a client application  See Database Code Page and Client Encoding in Advanced  Operations Guide for the various ways in which this can be accomplished        Note Changing the database code page does not convert existing data or metadata in the database   To avoid data corruption  ensurethat the code page setting matches the current encoding of any pre  existing data or metadata in the database        Database code page is particularly handy if you need to manually copy PSQL DDFsto another platform  with a different OS encoding and still have the metadata correct
238. r  if you use the alternate File Save dialog to save your changes  the  changes are saved to the encoding specified on the dialog     PCC automatically detects the encoding of a file if the file contains a BOM and displays that encoding in the alternate File  Open dialog  If the file does not contain a BOM and byte order is important  you need to select the proper encoding for the  save action              Default Encoding  In addition to changing thefile encoding during theopen or saveaction  you can set the default encoding  to use for opens and saves   This is also the default for importing data  exporting data  and exporting a  schema  See Importing Data with Import Data Wizard  Exporting Data with Export Data Wizard  and  Exporting a Schema   The same default applies for all of these  You cannot set different defaults for the  Open and save actions  for example    gt  To set a default encoding for File Open and File Save  1 In PCC  click Window  gt  Preferences then File Encoding   2 Select the desired encoding from the    Default encoding    list    The choices are explained in Encoding Choices for File Open and File Save Dialogs     3 Click OK        Note You can also access the File Encoding preferences from the dialogs for File Open  Save File   Import Data  Export Data  and Export Schema  Click    Change default encoding    in the dialog        Invalid File Name Characters    The alternate dialogs check for valid characters in a file name before allowing the open or
239. r is the server you want  If not  select a different server as  described in To Select a Server for License Administration     2 Press theF5 key     Theinformation for applied licenses is re  displayed  and any information is cleared from the Key  field     The Server Name field is cleared then displays the machine name to which License Administrator is  currently connected  For example  suppose License Administrator is connected to PVSW 1 and you  attempt to connect to PVSW 2  which does not have a database engine running  License  Administrator displays a message that it could not connect  and PVSW2 is displayed in the Server  Name field  After you click the F5 key  PVSW 1 is displayed in the field      gt  To Display Help    1    Click Help from the menu bar of the License Administrator  The License Administrator Graphical  User Interface section opens  It enables you to identify and understand the purpose of the objects on  the GUI     2 To consult other areas of documentation about the License Administrator  access the Table of    Contents for the documentation and click the desired area     115    License Administration      License Administration Concepts     to understand the basics of License Administrator      License Administrator Command Line Interface     to understand the options and parameters  for the CLI    e License Administration Tasks     to perform activities with License Administrator     CLI Tasks       Note For all of thefollowing tasks  the Windows 64
240. r the table being edited   To save changes for all tables being edited   To undo changes or to redo changes    Columns Tasks    Column tasks apply to the Columns page     To insert acolumn between existing columns  To insert acolumn at the end  To select acolumn or multiple columns    127    Table Editor        To delete a column   m To specify a column name     To seta column data type       To seta column size   m To set column precision       To seta column scale     To s amp t a column to allow or disallow nulls    To set case sensitivity for a column     Tosetacolumn collating sequence     Tosetacolumn default     Toset or remove a column asa primary key    Indexes Tasks  Index tasks apply to the Indexes page       To create an index     To create a unique index     To create a partial index       To modify an existing index    m To delete an index     TO insert an index segment     To modify an index segment     To delete an index     To arrange the order of index segments    To specify a sort order for an index    To allow duplicates in an index     To specify index as modifiable    Foreign Keys Tasks  Foreign keys tasks apply to the Foreign Keys page       To add a foreign key   m To modify a foreign key    To delete a foreign key    SQL View Tasks  SQL view tasks apply to the SQL View page     m To copy SQL statements  a To maximize or restore view of SQL statements    128    Table Editor Tasks    General Tasks     gt  To start Table Editor for a new table    1  2  3
241. re  To upgrade from Workgroup to Server typically requires no changes to  your application or to your database  Simply install the new version and you are ready to go  Because  PSQL Vx Server uses a different license model  it requires a full installation  You cannot upgrade PSQL  Server or Workgroup to PSQL Vx Server     PSQL Workgroup    PSQL Workgroup offers a peer to peer network setup designed for stand alone single user installations  up to small workgroups  The Workgroup engine is the only engine that offers multiuser access to PSQ L  data located on a computer where no database engine is installed     A major difference between Workgroup and Server is the Gateway feature of Workgroup  When thereis  no database engine running on the computer where the data is located  normally the first database  engine to connect to that data handles all requests from other engines to access that data  This feature  can be configured so that the same Workgroup engine always services that data  or the Gateway  designation can beallowed to    float    based on which Workgroup engineconnectsto thedatafirst during  any given work day     The Workgroup product uses the concurrent user licensing model  See License M odels     PSQL Server    PSQL Server offers a full client server architecture providing excellent performance and scalability for  up to thousands of concurrent users  The Server engine can be monitored and configured remotely  No  additional licenseis required for use with hype
242. remote server  Verify that all of the communication  components are loaded on the remote server and that there are available sessions and  try again    You may receive this error when attempting to register a new remote server in PCC  There are several  reasons you may receive this error     1 You mis typed the server name  The database client tried to connect to a server that does not exist     Solution  D ouble  check the name of the server  and make sure you can seeit in your Network  Neighborhood  spelled exactly how you entered it     If you know theserver exists but you can   t seeit in your Network Neighborhood  makesurethat you  are logged into the correct network  Ask your network administrator for help     2  Theserver user count has expired  If you have been using a temporary license  you will get this  message for connection attempts after the license has expired     226    Error M essages from PCC    Solution  Run License Administrator to check the status of licenses installed on the server  In the  window that appears  you can see detailed status information on each license that has been applied  to your server  If your license has expired  purchase a permanent license from your reseller or from  Actian Corporation     3  Thereareno available sessions on the server  If you havea heavy load of users on the server  or if you  have configured the server with asmall number of sessions  you may receive this error     Solution  Run M onitor to check the usage of sessi
243. rence     Changing a column data type sets the defaults for that type on the following  size  scale  precision   default  and collate     1 Ensurethat the    Columns    page of Table Editor is active  If required  perform the steps for To work  with columns     2 Click in the Type cell for the desired column   Open thelist for data types  click y        4 Scroll to the data type you want   You may also type the first letter of the desired data type to scroll   Repeatedly typing the first letter scrolls to each data type that begins with that letter      132    5  6    Table Editor Tasks    Click the data type you want   Click File  gt  Save or  El before changing pages within Table Editor        Note Changing a data type on a column that contains a default value causes the default valueto be  cleared  reset the value if necessary         gt  To set a column size    Datain your databaseis truncated if you changethe column to a smaller sizefor the following data types     4  5    CHAR  NUMERIC  VARCHAR    Ensure that the    Columns    page of Table Editor is active  If required  perform the steps for To work  with columns     Click in the Size cell for the desired column     You can set asize only for applicable data types  such as CHAR  If sizeis not applicable  the grid cell  is shaded and you will be unable to edit the Size     Delete the existing size   Type the size you want   Click File  gt  Save or  El before changing pages within Table Editor      gt  To set column prec
244. rimary Table    to display the list of tables permissible as primary tables     145    Table Editor    6    7    10    11    Foreign Key Editor            Foreign Keys Foreign Key Details    Po mplkey Add                      Select Primary Table  MyPKT able  Delete mytab  able    MyPRT  Primary Table Fields   Foreign Table reids                             Click the desired table in the list  only tables with a primary key appear in the list    Theprimary field s  in thetable appear in    Primary Table Fields    column     Foreign Key Editor                                    Foreign Keys Foreign Key Details  Po mplkey Add     Select Primary Table  MyPKT able  X  Delete  Primary Table Fields Foreign Table Fields    Coll PKT able  Col2PKT able    Match fields in the foreign table with fields in the primary table     Click the empty cell in the    Foreign Table Fields    column for thecorresponding field in the    Primary  Table Fields     then click   to displays the list of permissible fields     Foreign Key Editor                                              Foreign Keys Foreign Key Details    o mpikey Add     Select Primary Table MyPKT able El  Delete  Primary Table Fields Foreign Table Fields  Coll PKTable 7   Col2PKT able Coll FRevT able       Note The data type and size of the fields must match  The list of Foreign Table Fields contains only  fields that are the same data type and size as the primary table field being matched        Click the desired field in the list  
245. rmation as you see  fit  It verifies that the data inserted fits within defined attributes for the database fields      Allowsyou to analyzerelationships among different sets of data  The DBM S stores thedatain a way  that allows you to examine how any piece of data relates to any other piece of data     In summary  the DBM S organizes your data  keeps it safe  and helps you to useit and understand it     Components of PSQL    ThePSQL DBMS consists of a variety of components designed to help you achieve your data  management goals     MicroKernel Database Engine    TheM icroKernel Engineis the high performance heart of PSQL  This engine works directly with the  data fileson your computer   s hard disk  When requested  it directly inserts new data  deletes unnecessary  data  and ensures thesafety and integrity of the data files at all times  even when people and applications  are working with the data     Relational Database Engine    The Relational Engine interacts with the M icroKernel Engine and the Client  described below   It  provides many powerful features including support for M icrosoft ODBC  sophisticated search and  analysis capability  and security     Client  also called Requester     In client server systems  the Client resides on the computer workstation  The client interacts with the  client application and across the network with both the MicroKernel Engine and the Relational Engine  on the server     Introducing PSQL    PSQL Control Center    ThePSQL Control 
246. rmation on the tests it performs  You can use   the PSA log file  this log file to review tests at a later time or to forward them to  PSQL Technical Support depending on the situation     The Append to the log file option adds content to the end of the  log file to provide a running history  If this option is cleared  the log  file starts anew and only information from the current PSA session  is captured                    173    PSQL System Analyzer  PSA        PSA Tasks    General Tasks    To start PSA    View Modules Tasks    To select options for View Modules    Test Active Installation Tasks      To test your network    To test the M icroKernel  transactional  Engine    To test the Relational Engine    Log Files Tasks      To specify a different location for the PSA logfile    To view the log file at the completion of PSQ L System Analyzer    General Tasks     gt  To start PSA    1 Access PSQL System Analyzer from the operating system Start menu or Apps screen or execute  psawizrd exe from acommand prompt     For default locations of PSQL files  see Where are the PSQL files installed  in Getting Started With  PSQL   View Modules Tasks     gt  To select options for View Modules  1 Start PSA and click Next   2 Click View Loaded PSQL Modules   3 Click Next   A dialog appears similar to the following     174    PSA Tasks    Figure27 View Modules Section of PSA    Module Types  Search Locations   IV Pervasive engines and requesters M In Memory  TF Pervasive utilities MV PAT
247. rmine the  Data In Use Limit     If you deauthorize the permanent product key  all increase keys associated with that permanent key are  also deauthorized  If you deauthorize an increase key  only the data in use increase associated with that  key is deauthorized     Note that the database engine logs a message to the PSQL logging repositories when the limit for data in  use is increased  The message contains the current limit and usage  See also M essage Logging  You can  monitor the current  peak  and maximum values of data in use with the M onitor utilities  See  Monitoring in Advanced Operations Guide     Trial versions of the software include a trial license that have a set value for datain use that cannot be  increased     Message Logging    M essages pertaining to licensing are logged to the various logging repositories used by PSQL  such as  Notification Viewer  See Reviewing M essage Logs in Advanced O perations Guide     104    License Administrator Graphical U ser Interface       License Administrator Graphical User Interface    The graphical user interface  GUI  License Administrator runs only on Windows platforms and allows  you to authorizeand deauthorizekeys  increase user count and datain uselimits  monitor session counts  and view license information  You can start the GUI as a stand alone application or from within PSQL  Control Center  PCC   You can administer licenses for local or remote database engines with the GUI     See also GU  Tasks for the tasks sp
248. rom Btrieve 6 15  Frequently asked questions about Btrieve 6 15     Is there a tool that replaces Xtrieve     Thereisno direct replacement  but you should consider using Crystal Reports for Btrieveas an excellent  upgrade from Xtrieve for reporting on and querying Btrieve data     Upgrading and Migration   Frequently asked questions about upgrading and migration    When I create a table using an existing Btrieve file  the wizard displays fewer columns than there  are in the Btrieve file  What   s wrong     Btrieve files contain alimited amount of information about the structure of the file  The table creation  wizard can figure out some field definitions using the indexes  but after the indexes are exhausted  data  segments may remain that contain morethan one actual field  Thewizard hasno way of interpreting the  contents  You must use your detailed knowledge of therecord structure to split out these fields and build  a table definition that matches all the fields in the record     The procedure for this task is provided in Advanced O perations Guide  Where can   find information on migration from earlier product versions to PSQL v12  Where  can   find migration and compatibility information     Getting Started With PSQL contains an entire chapter that provides detailed instructions on how to  upgrade     If your application uses Scalable SQL or ODBC  then you should review theApplication M igration Guide  available on the web site     Miscellaneous  Frequently asked questio
249. rompt   clilcadm    lt generate   g gt  product key output filenameath    2 Savethefileto a portable storage device or in a location that can be easily accessed by the machine  that has Internet connectivity     Ya       Tip If the machine with Internet connectivity does not have PSQL installed  you must also copy the  licgetauth exe file from the PSQL bin folder to the portable storage device or remote location        Phase 2   Transmit Authorization Request D ata and Retrieve Authorization Key Data    1 AtmachineB  with Internet connectivity   connect to the portable storage device or access the  location where you saved the Authorization Request Data file    118    License Administration T asks    2 Enter thefollowing at a command prompt  where output_filename ath isthe file you created in step  1 of Phase 1     licgetauth exe output_filename ath    The above command retrieves the Authorization Key Data used to authorize the key and the  product  The authorization key data is saved as a  pky file to the same location where you saved the  authorization request file    Ya       Tip If you saved the Authorization Request Data and Authorization Key Data files to a hard drive   you will need to copy these files to either a portable storage device or aremote location        Phase 3   Install Authorization Key Data    1 Back at machineA  without Internet connectivity   connect once more to the portable storage  device or access the location wherethe authorization key data was sav
250. roup    Type the name that you want for the group    Click Finish     To create a new user using PSQL Explorer   Turn security on for the database as explained in General Tasks   Expand thenodes for the database    Right click on the Users node then click New  gt  User    Type the name that you want for the user    Type a password for Password and re type it for Confirm Password     Passwords are case sensitive  For alist of database object lengths and invalid characters  see Identifier  Restrictions by Identifier Type in Advanced O perations Guide     Optionally  assign the user to a group   Click   for Group  then click the desired group in the list   Click Finish     85    Using PSQL Control Center     gt     To assign a user to a group using PSQL Explorer    Note that a given user cannot bea member of morethan onegroup  All usersin a group have exactly the  permissions defined for that group  You cannot grant or revoke individual permissions for a user who is  amember of a group     1  2    3  4  5  6     gt     Turn security on for the database as explained in General Tasks     If the desired group does not exist  create the group as explained in To create a new group using  PSQL Explorer     Right click on a user name under the Users node then click Properties   Click General in the Properties tree    Click     for Group  then click the desired group in the list    Click OK     To delete a group or user using PSQL Explorer    Note that a group can be deleted only if no 
251. rvisor features such as live migration  failover  fault  tolerance  FT   high availability  HA   and disaster recovery     The Server engine must be located on the same computer as the data files it is intended to access   PSQL Server uses the concurrent user licensing model  See License M odels     PSQL Vx Server    PSQL Vx Server has the same capabilities as PSQL Server  except that its license model supports service  bureau  software as  a service  or other environments with multiplexed clients  PSQL Vx Server has no  restrictions on hosting  connection pooling  Internet or intranet use     PSQL Vx Server uses the capacity based licensing model  See License M odels     10    Understanding the DBM S Products    Because PSQL V x Server is built on technology used for PSQL Server  it shares most of the database  functionality and documentation of PSQL Server  Throughout the PSQL documentation  all topics for  PSQL Server also apply to PSQL Vx Server unless differences are explicitly cited     Crystal Reports for PSQL    Crystal Reportsis an optional product that providesrich capabilities for creating and formatting reports  based on PSQL databases  Reports can be customized in thousands of ways and published as HTML   Microsoft Word document  M icrosoft Excel document  or other formats     For moreinformation about Crystal Reports  contact your sales representative or visit the Actian PSQL  website     11    Introducing PSQL       Using PSQL Documentation    All PSQL document
252. s   Optional 0  zero  The maximum number of errors that the BDU ignores    before exiting  The BDU exits when the    first error is encountered          lt r R gt  reject_file Optional stderr Name of the file to which to write the rows that failed load   The specified directory must exist  However  if the file  does not exist in the specified directory  it will be created       lt f F gt  first_row Optional Row 1 The first row in the delimited text file with which the load  begins  This parameter allows you to skip a header row   For example  if your header row is row 1  set first_row to  2          lt I L gt  last_row Optional End of the source file Last row in source file  row will be included in load   The  load will stop after the end row has been loaded         lt t T gt  field_term Optional A character  such as a Column delimiter in the source file  comma or tab character         lt n N gt  row_term Optional A new line character Row delimiter in the source file         lt o O gt  output _file   Optional stderr Name of the file to which to write the information and error  messages during load  The specified directory must exist   However  if the file does not exist in the specified  directory  it will be created          lt u U gt  login_id Optional User name to connect to the Relational Engine         lt p P gt  password Optional Password to connect to the Relational Engine                      186    Command Line Interface Utility Reference    Table17 Bulk Data Utility
253. s UTF 16LE encoding        bdu demodata Billing D  billing data_import txt  c UTF 16LE    To run the BDU for a database that requires username and password   bdu demodata BDU Table C  data_file txt  u  lt username gt   p  lt password gt     To run the BDU with max errors option   bdu demodata BDU Table C  data_file txt  e  lt no of errors user wants to allow gt     For instance  for loading to continue until 100 errors have occurred        bdu demodata BDU Table C  data_file txt  e 100    To run the BDU with a specific column delimiter option    bdu demodata BDU Table C  data file txt  t  lt column delimiter gt   Example    When the source file contains text in which each row is separated by      189    Command Line Interface Utilities    bdu demodata BDU Table C  data_file txt  t      To run the BDU with a specific row delimiter option   bdu demodata BDU Table C  data_file txt  n  lt row delimiter gt     For instance  when the source file contains text in which each row is separated by  n        bdu demodata BDU Table C  data_file txt  n An    To run the BDU with a specific start row option     bdu demodata BDU Table C  data_file txt  f  lt line no  from which user wants loading  to begin gt     To run the BDU with a specific end row option     bdu demodata BDU Table C  data_file txt  l  lt line no  at which user wants loading to  end gt     You may combine parameters  To load the first 15 rows from the source file containing data that is  separated by   and is enclosed in  
254. s and hold Shift or Ctrl then click  4  for the desired additional  columns     131    Table Editor     gt  To delete a column    1 Ensurethat the    Columns    page of Table Editor is active  If required  perform the steps for To work  with columns     2 Right click anywhere on the desired column row   3 Click Drop Column     Ya       Tip You can also delete a column by clicking an existing column row  then pressing Ctrl D elete or    clicking Ei    You can also delete multiple columns by selecting multiple columns rows  See To select a column or  multiple columns     4 Click File  gt  Save or Hl before changing pages within Table Editor         gt  To specify a column name    1 Ensurethat the    Columns    page of Table Editor is active  If required  perform the steps for To work  with columns     2 Clickin the Column Name cell for the desired column   3  Deletethe existing column name   4 Typethename you want        Tip For a list of database object lengths and invalid characters  see Identifier Restrictions by  Identifier Type in Advanced Operations Guide        Also  asa general rule  avoid using reserved words for column names  See Reserved Wordsin SQL  Engine Reference  See also SQL Grammar Support in ODBC Guide     5 Click File  gt  Save or before changing pages within Table Editor      gt  To set a column data type    The data in your database is converted if you change a column data type  For a listing of data types  see  PSQL Supported Data Types in SQL Engine Refe
255. s granted by a license agreement     The value for data in use increases when a data fileis first opened  Subsequent opens to an already open  data file do not add to the total  Data in use also increases if an open file increases in size  Operations on  an already open file continue to be permitted even if the size of the open file increases beyond the data  in use limit     The value for data in use decreases when a data file is closed by the final user to have the file open  Since  more than one user can access the same data file  all opens must be closed before data in use decreases     M essages pertaining to data in use are logged to the various PSQL logging repositories  See M essage  Logging   Thedatabase engine uses various files for its own internal processes  such as PSQL system files  metadata    files  dbnames cfg  and default databases  Files used for internal processes do not increase the value for  data in use     Estimating Data In Use    You need to determine what size license you need for your business  To make that determination  you  need information about your data usage  PSQL provides Capacity Usage Viewer to provide that  information     Capacity Usage Viewer is a utility that records peak daily data use  It renders those figures into a graph  that displays your use over time  Capacity Usage Viewer enables you to select time periods ranging from  All to Last week  You can also zoom in to view the data for a customized time period     To estimate your c
256. s reserved for situations where the key is incompatible  with the current engine  Examples would include previous versions of PSQL  such as v10 and prior  on v11  or a Workgroup key on a Server engine  or 32 bit key on a 64 bit engine      Expired   key is no longer available for use  Temporary keys move to the Expired state once their  evaluation period has passed      Disabled   key isno longer available for use  If a key is disabled because of a failed validation  it can  be restored to active by fixing the problem and then performing a validation on the key    m Failed Validation   key is usable but only for a set number of days  See Failed Validation and Failed   Validation Period     102    License Administration Concepts    Failed Validation and Failed Validation Period    If a key fails validation  you havea set number of days to remedy any condition that caused it to fail  This  period of time  referred to as the    failed validation period     is reported in the Expiration Date column  of License Administrator  as shown in GU  Visual Reference  If the condition for the failed validation is  not corrected by the date  the key changes state to disabled     After you implement changes to correct the failed validation  perform a Validation action  See To  Perform a Validation  The validation  among other actions  verifies the current machine signature and  key combination  If the conditions were corrected  the state of the key changes to active     More than one conditi
257. s to the remote server DSN  To create a client DSN   follow theinstructionsin Setting Up Client Access from a Windows Client  You must first make sure  that a server DSN exists on the server you want to access     You can now rule out the client DSN as the source of the problem     Thefinal task to perform is to ensure that your client and server are communicating on the  appropriate network protocols  By default  PSQL ships with all network protocols enabled  so  connection time may be slow as it tries all protocols  but it should eventually connect  Some  application vendors disable the protocols that are not typically used by their application s      First  determine what protocols ought to be used on your network  If you havea Linux network or  a 100  Microsoft network  then your preferred protocol is TCP IP     Once you know what the protocol should be  you should ensure that your server is using this  protocol  You must have administrative rights on the server operating system  or be a member of  Pervasive Admin  to perform this task  In PCC  right click on the server name then click  Properties  Click Communication Protocols  Ensure that the correct protocol is listed in the  Supported Protocols list and that TCP IP is selected     General Troubleshooting    Ensurethat your client isusingthesame protocol  Using PCC  right click on Local Client then click  Properties  Click Communication Protocols and ensure that the correct protocol is selected in the  Supported Protoc
258. s your local client computer  then click Properties   Click Access and ensure that Use Remote M icroKernel Engine is selected     You can now rule out the requester as the source of the problem     4 Nett  verify that PSQL is installed and running on the target server     On Windows  open Services under Administrative Tools  Verify that PSQL Transactional Engine  and PSQL Relational Engine have been started  If not  start these services     On Linux  typethe following command at the Linux prompt on the server where the database  engine is installed     ps  e   egrep    mkded          223    Basic Troubleshooting    224    If the output from the command returns at least one line containing the text    mkde     then PSQL is  running  If you do not see this line  then you need to be logged into the root account and start the  database engine by entering   etc init d psql start    You can now be certain that the server engine is installed and running   The next step is to ensure that the server engine is accepting remote communication requests     In PCC  ensure that the remote database engine is configured to accept remote requests  If you are  having difficulty accessing a Windows 32 bit server engine remotely  then you must check the setting  at the server itself  You must have administrative permission on the server  or membership in the  Pervasive Admin group  in order to do so  In PCC  right click on the server  then click Properties   Click Access and ensure that Accept Re
259. screen      gt  To stop the Workgroup Engine as an application on Windows    These steps assume that the Workgroup Engine was installed as an application  See Installing the PSQL  Workgroup for Windows in Getting Started With PSQL     1 Click Stop Workgroup Engine from the operating system Start menu or Apps screen        Note You will receive a warning message when trying to stop the engine if any of the following is  true          There are active clients     No activity took place since the engine loaded     10 seconds has not elapsed since the last operation took place      gt  To start the Workgroup Engine as a service on Windows    These steps assume that the Workgroup Engine was installed as a service  which is the default for a fresh  install  See Installing the PSQL Workgroup for Windows in Getting Started With PSQL     1 Refer to the various methods described in the section Starting and Stopping the Server Engine on a  Windows Server     2 Substitute    PSQL Workgroup Engine    as the service name if you use Windows Services control  panel  Substitute    psqlWGE    as the service name if you use net start or psc    gt  To stop the Workgroup Engine as a service on Windows    These steps assume that the Workgroup Engine was installed as a service  which is the default for a fresh  install  See Installing the PSQL Workgroup for Windows in Getting Started With PSQL     14 Refer to the various methods described in the section Starting and Stopping the Server Engine on a 
260. se is set to Bound or if  Referential Integrity is being enforced  the data files are bound to that database name   See also Bound    Database versus Integrity Enforced      To ensurethat such tables can be opened for the new database  you need to repair the database namefor    the new database  The tables are then associated with the new database     1 In PCC PSQL Explorer  expand the Databases node and right click on the database name that you    want to repair     2 Click Repair Database Name     Thefollowing table explains additional actions  if any  that are required based on security settings    for the database  the tables  or both  See also Security Tasks        Security Setting    Action Required       None    None  Repair Database Name executes without further interaction required        Database Security    Btrieve Security Classic    You must provide the user name    Master    and the password for Master     See also Database Security in Advanced Operations Guide     If the database engine is running on a remote server and your operating system user  name and password differ between the local machine and the remote server  you  must provide the user name and password for the remote server     See also Classic in Advanced Operations Guide        Btrieve Security Mixed       70       The data directories for the tables must be added to the DEFAULTDB database  See  The Default Database and the Current Database in Advanced Operations Guide     In addition  the other a
261. sks     These objects appear as nodes in the PSQL Explorer        Object Description Related Information  Triggers A type of stored procedure that are automatically executed   CREATE TRIGGER in SQL Engine Reference  when data in a table is modified with an INSERT  UPDATE   or DELETE  Common SQL Object Tasks  Stored A collection of one or more SQL statements that can take   CREATE PROCEDURE in SQL Engine  procedures and return user supplied parameters  Reference    Common SQL Object Tasks       User defined   A scalar routine that returns a value  CREATE FUNCTION in SQL Engine Reference  functions    Common SQL Object Tasks          Views A database object that stores a query and behaves like a CREATE VIEW in SQL Engine Reference  table     Common SQL Object Tasks                80    Groups  U sers  and Security       Groups  Users  and Security    Security is a database property that requires a user to provide a user name and password to access the  database  By default  database security is turned off     Database security can beturned on through PCC or by executing an SQL statement  Once enabled  you  may create groups and users and assign permissions to them  Permissions can include database rights   table rights  and column rights within tables     When you turn security on or off  the M aster user must have only one connection open and must bethe  only user connected     Assoon as you turn security on for the first time  only the M aster user can access the database  Th
262. spectively  because the files that PCC  deals with are SQL documents   For example  File  gt  N ew creates aSQL document      Thedialogs allow you to work with files containing character encodings different from the system  encoding more easily than with the standard dialogs for open and save  For example  if you create a SQL  script that contains wide character data  saving the file without the proper encoding could result in lost  data  the system code page in use may not support wide character data  for example      Note that you can access the standard operating system dialog for file selection by choosing Browse on  Open SQL Document or Save SQL Document     This section covers the following topics      Encoding Choices     Default Encoding   a Invalid File Name Characters   a FileOpen Dialog  Open SQL Document    a File Save Dialog  Save SQL Document    m Using the Standard Operating System Dialogs    Encoding Choices    The dialogs allow you to change the file encoding during the open or save action  In addition  the File  Open dialog showsa preview of the data based on theselected fileencoding  Thefollowing table explains  the encoding choices     Table12 Encoding Choices for File Open and File Save Dialogs    Encoding Discussion     system code page  The default is the system code page currently in use  For example  on Windows platforms in  English you commonly see    windows 1252           Big5 Big5 is a Chinese character encoding method used for traditional Chinese
263. spects of Mixed security are enforced  such as user names  defined in the database corresponding exactly with the user names defined in the  operating system  See Mixed in Advanced Operations Guide        Security Setting    Creating  M odifying  Deleting  and Repairing PSQL Databases       Action Required       Btrieve Security Database    If Database Security is turned on  Master password specified   no further  requirements are needed for Database Btrieve Security  The privileges for Master  are sufficient     See also Database in Advanced Operations Guide           Owner Name for a table          If a table has an owner name  Repair Database Name prompts you for the owner  name   An exception to this is if the option    Permit read only access without an owner  name    is specified for the owner name   See also Owner Names in Advanced  Operations Guide     You can provide the owner name for an individual table  or a list of all owner names  associated with the set of tables  separate each owner name with a comma and a  space   By default  owner names are displayed as asterisks  If you want to view the  owner name s  as plain text  select Show owner names     You can omit providing an owner name for a specific table with the Skip button  To  skip all tables with an owner name  select Do not ask again for owner names     Tables requiring an owner name that is unknown will be skipped then click Skip     Table  Billing  requires an owner name  Please provide one or more owner
264. ssword  User names and passwords cannot be set up until security is turned  on  so the database will be inaccessible to each user for the period of time until you have set up a user   account for that user     Nn oO 0 fF WO N      82    In PSQL Explorer  expand the Engines node  then the Databases node    Right click on the desired database then click Properties    Click Security in the Properties tree    Click the Security tab    Click Enable Security to check mark the option    Type the password you want for Master Password  then re type it for Confirm Password   Click OK     Groups  U sers  and Security    Database security is now on and you are logged in as the M aster user  For instructions on creating  database user accounts  see User and Group Tasks    gt  To turn on security using SQL    You must be logged into the computer as an administrator or as a member of the Pervasive Admin  Operating system security group     Turning on security prevents all users from accessing the database unless they log in to it using a valid  database user name and password  User names and passwords cannot be set up until security is turned  on  so the database will be inaccessible to each user for the period of time until you have set up a user  account for that user     4 Turn security on for the database as explained in General Tasks    2 Inthe Filemenu of PCC  click New  gt  SQL Document  or click  si in the toolbar    The Select D atabase dialog box appears   Click the database in th
265. sword for the user identified by username   server servername Name of the server on which the database is defined  If you do not specify this option  the    local machine is assumed  You may also specify the IP address of the server     port number TCP port number on which the database engine running on servername is listening  If you  do not specify this option  the default port 1583 is assumed   Port 1583 is the default port  used for the Relational Engine      stoponfail Stop when the first SQL error is encountered in commanafile  Pvddl returns an error code  of PS_E FAIL if an error is encountered  which equates to  2147467259 decimal   The  default action is for pvddl to continue after an SQL error is encountered     log logfile Write output to a file instead of to standard output  stdout   Logfile specifies the name of the    file to which output is logged and  optionally  a path to the file  If path is omitted   ogfile is  created in the same directory in which dvddl resides     See Also  SQL Engine Reference for more information about supported SQL syntax     216    Command Line Interface Utility Reference    pvnetpass    Description    pvnetpassisthePSQL network password utility  It isa command line utility used to managethe user IDs  and passwords for servers to which your client connects  When trying to connect to a server  the client  looks up the server name in the registry and uses the user name and password set for that server     If your application uses the M
266. t   Description Related Information       Remaining Displays the remaining number of authorizations for all product keys and the To Display Remaining  Authorizatio   remaining number of repairs that a user can perform on a key in a state of Failed   Authorizations    ns Authorization or Disabled    Return to GUI Dialog    This information also displays automatically at the time of authorization and image   deauthorization  if applicable              Help Displays the online help for License Administrator  To Display Help   Return to GUI Dialog  image    Close Closes the License Administrator Utility  Return to GUI Dialog  image                 107    License Administration       License Administrator Command Line Interface    The command line interface  CLI  runs on all platforms supported by PSQL  The CLI is functionally  equivalent to the GUI  You can administer licenses for local or remote database engines with the CLI     TheGUI and the CLI list information about the authorized licenses  such as the type of license  user  count  session count  data in use limit  platform  expiration date  and so forth  License key information  is also available from the installation media     CLI Syntax   TheCLI uses the same syntax on all platforms   utility_name option parameters   Theutility name is one of the following        Clilcadm exe  Windows 32 bit    a w04clilcadm exe  Windows 64 bit    a   clilcadm  Linux 32 bit    a   clilcadm64  Linux 64 bit    The following table describes 
267. t the first character position        4 Identifies the computer and the database to which the SQL document applies  The computer name is listed first  followed by the database name  In the image above  the computer is    tment    and the database is    DEMODATA        Note  If None is specified as the database context  then the text    No Database Selected    appears instead of the  name of the computer and database  The commands to execute SQL statements are disabled if None is specified   See To set database context for an SQL query               gt  To create an SQL query or script    By default  when you start SQL Editor  you may type in SQL statements  A script is one or more SQL  statements saved as a text file     4 Perform the steps for To start SQL Editor for a new SQL query   2 TypetheSQL statements into SQL Editor    Separate SQL statements with a delimiter  You can use the pound sign    or thesemicolon       3 Optionally  click File  gt  Save As to save the SQL statements as a text file      gt  To open an SQL script    A script isoneor more SQL statements saved as a text file  You can execute the statements in SQL Editor  after you open ascript in the editor     1 Click File  gt  Open     160    SQL Editor Tasks    2 Navigate to the location of the text file  select the file  then click O pen     By default  the Open dialog looks for files in the PVSW bin directory with a file name extension of     SQ L    3 Executethefile  See To run all SQL statements in SQL Ed
268. t to create with the older version format  Click OK to create the file  Close the File  Information Editor window  but do not exit Btrieve Maintenance Utility     From the menu  select Data then Copy  Enter thename of the source data file and the name of the target  data file  your newly created file with the older version file format   Click Executeto copy the records  into the older version file  After the copying has finished  if you need the new data file to have the same  nameas it did previously  save your original datafile with a different name  then save your new file using  the original file name     ODBC and DDFs  Frequently asked questions about ODBC and dictionary files     234    Frequently Asked Questions    How can l tell if I can use ODBC to access my data files     There are several ways to find out  First  look for  DDF files where the data files are located  If you see  them  then most likely you can access the database using ODBC  Becauseit is possible to have DDF files  located in a different directory  you should also use PCC to determine whether a database has been  created for the data files you want to access  Finally  you can ask your application vendor whether their  application uses ODBC to access the data files     How can a hard coded filepath in a DDF be changed     In PCC  right click on the database to which the table belongs  then click Properties  Cl ick Directories   Change the value for Dictionary Location     It may appear that the path h
269. t with an alphabetic character  use single  quotes      pvdbpass demodata Joe oldpassword  123   To change a password on a remote server     pvdbpass demodata Joe oldpass newpass  server financel    215    Command Line Interface Utilities    pvddl    Description  pvddl is used to execute a series of SQL statements in a command file     Synopsis    pvddl database commandfile         separator character    username username    password password    server servername     port number    stoponfail    log logfile        Options  database Database against which the SQL statements in commandfile are to be executed  this can  be a database name or a server DSN    commandfile Text file that contains the SQL statements  Certain categories of SQL statements  such as    data definition language  are better suited for use in commandfile   Contrast this with a data  manipulation statement such as SELECT  A SELECT statement can be used  but the result  set is not returned to standard output      You need a separator character between each command in your command file  See    separator character      separator character Character used in commandfile to separate SQL statements  The valid choices are any  printable character  However  ensure that character does not occur within any of the SQL  statements  Common character choices include the pound sign      semicolon      and at    sign        username username Name of a user defined for a database with security enabled    password password Pas
270. tabase     ODBC Standard    PSQL adheres to the Microsoft standard for ODBC database connections  According to the standard   applications using ODBC must connect to databases through Data Source N ames  DSN s  defined in the  Operating system        Note PSQL does not support File DSNs  You must use User or System DSN  System DSN s are  generally preferred  because they are available to all users on a given computer        Every PSQL database that you expect to access using an ODBC application must havea DSN that  identifies the database  A DSN that points to the PSQL database engine is called an Engine DSN  Engine  DSN sare 32 bit only and are deprecated  A 32 bit DSN that points to an Engine DSN or to a named  databaseiscalled aClient DSN A DSN on a64 bit operating system is simply referred to asa 64 bit DSN   without designation of Engine or Client     N ew or revised 32 bit applications  local or remote  should connect to anamed database instead of using  Engine DSNs  Alternately  applications could use DSN  less connections by specifying the PSQL ODBC  driver name  see PSQL ODBC Driver Names in ODBC Guide   Avoiding the use of Engine DSNs  positions your application for the future when Engine DSN s will no longer be supported in PSQL     Windows 64 bit operating systems contain two different executable files for ODBC Administrator  one  for 32 bit DSN s and one for 64 bit DSNs  Each ODBC Administrator lists the system DSN s that only  match its bitness  For the 64 bit P
271. tabase user names  passwords  and permissions are retained but not used if security isturn off  If  security is re enabled  the previous user names  passwords  and permissions take effect again   An  exception is the M aster user  The M aster password is not retained nor re  applied         4 Turn security on for the database as explained in General Tasks    2 InthePCC File menu  click New  gt  SQL Document  or click in the toolbar    The Select D atabase dialog appears    Click the database in the list for which you want to create a group or user    Click OK    In SQL Editor  issue the SQL statenent SET SECURITY NULL    Click SQL  gt  Execute in Text  or click   in the toolbar     See also SET SECURITY in SQL Engine Reference     ao a A   WwW    Btrieve Security Policy Tasks     gt  To set or change the security policy for a database       3  Caution Changing security policy for a database may prevent current users from accessing the  database  if security is turned on and the given users do not have equivalent user accounts and rights  under the new security policy        Turn security on for the database as explained in General Tasks    In PSQL Explorer  expand the Engines node  then the Databases node   Right click the desired database then click Properties    Click Security in the Properties tree    Click the Btrieve Security tab    Click the desired policy  Classic  Mixed  or Database    Click OK    See also the chapter PSQL Security in Advanced Operations Guide     Nn 
272. tee Sas He eel ce ae ee eee Barn aa ae eed th ee Ee aA Hse chal ee at 127  Indexes Tasks oa A aed A A ea eae BE ew A 128  Foragn Keys Tasks  o ia a E ADe aa eke bere Se be ee A Wea he 128  SOL VI Taks   44 44  Ques Shas da BAA a wee BAPE ee R BA RA a 128  6  CSQL EqiHOM cutis a Soar a ee aa ds did ene ya ar de aw apa die An 149  A Tour of theSQL Editor  SQL Editor Concepts  osia e a i dae Rhd Phe A Sheedy ek 150  VOR VICI Ets La tine oN Farce A E NR gn acca ee ye 150  ROSEFIGELONS 2 mesna eaei he eal asa tas Sate eee ae aN at cee ar ae mee ae ian ae 151  Displaying Statement Results    es 151  OutlineWindowView                 aea a a aa a a E T a ai 153  Working with Common SQL Objects          o o es 155  SQL Editor U sed in SQL View Tab of Table Editor      oona o    ooo oo    o    156  SQIEGItOrTaskSy  irradia a da dd a ed i 157  General Tasks  zina a ide A a Ped Se ie Be 157  EXGCULION MASKS  A A TE 157  Grid ASKS has amara a aa a a ia ie a dara 158   TOXEMICW TASKS tito e ti esis ah Paik ke te Ae ee 158  Outline View Tasks iora e ii a a ed eR ee a ee a 158    vi    Common SQL Object Tasks    ooa Fa aa Se NA A Re eRe De 158    7 PSQL System Analyzer  PSA     2    6  ee       169  Usage Information for the Diagnostic Utility PSA  PSA CONCEDES  sos eis ae Path eo aa ean BU ee ae ee 170  Frequently Asked QUESTIONS   6  ees 171  PSA GUI Visual Reference  vaca nd Maca an Wa eek a aA het Bal oli 173  PSA Task  Ain We at Dee Bakke aire tint Aes etn a dl rs AE Mk es 174  General
273. telephone authorization     Telephone Deauthorization    Telephone deauthorization is not available  If you authorized PSQL using telephone authorization  you  must call Actian Corporation to deauthorize     Notification Viewer    The Notification Viewer is a utility for displaying messages logged by the licensing components  The  purpose of the utility isto inform you of noteworthy licensing messages in a noticeable but unobtrusive  manner  Although not part of License Administrator  Notification Viewer is mentioned here because of  its allied purpose pertaining to licensing    gt  To View Licensing Messages In Logging Repositories  1 Seethe following topic in Advanced Operations Guide for the repository in which you are interested     Notification Viewer    Operating System Event Log     PSQL Event Log  PVSW LOG     120    Table Editor       A Tour of PCC Table Editor    Thetopics in this chapter include      Table Editor Concepts     Table Editor Graphical User Interface    TableEditor Tasks    chapter          121       Table Editor       Table Editor Concepts    This section contains the following topics       Overview    Table Editor Pages      Data Types    a Null Values    Overview    Table Editor is one of the editor windows within PSQL Control Center  PCC   Table Editor is a special  type of editor that contains multiple pages  The pages are represented by tabs across the bottom of the  editor  The editor allows you to add  delete  or changethe characteristics of co
274. ter data in it  the legacy solution was for the access method  such as  ODBC usinga DSN  to specify OEM  ANSI conversion  Now it is possible to set the OEM code page for  the database and have the access method specify automatic translation  See also Automatic in ODBC  Guide     63    UsingPSQL Control Center    Directories  Theproperty settings for Directories specify where certain types of files reside on physical storage     a Dictionary Location  a Data Directories    Dictionary Location    This location specifies where the dictionary files  DDFs  reside on physical storage  This location must  be on the same server to which you are connected  and where the database engine is running   The  location must be formatted as though you are working directly at the server machine     m For Windows operating systems  enter a path in the form drive  path  where driveis a drive letter on  the server     a For Linux  enter the standard Linux path format from root     For example  if you are at a workstation connected to a Windows server where the database engine is  running  and you want to create a new database on the CA drive of the server in the folder    mydata      enter the location as    c  mydata     You would enter it this way even if you havea local network drive  for  example  F    mapped to the server s CA drive    Data Directories    The Data Directories list specifies where the data files resideon physical storage  Add locations to thelist  by clicking New  Remove lets
275. tform            Note You must be logged onto the Windows server as a user with full administrator level rights on  the server or be amember of the Pervasive Admin group defined on the server     In the Windows Control Panel  double click Users and Passwords   Click the Advanced tab  In the Advanced User Management area  click Advanced   Click the Groups folder  From the menu  click Action  gt  New Group     kh O N      Typein Pervasive Admin asthe group name    To add users to this group  click Add  select user name  click Add then OK      al    Click Createto createthe group   6 Click Close        Note If the Logon as setting for the PSQL servicesis not System Account  see Services Settings and  Log In Authority        Services Settings and Log In Authority    Certain operating system settings for the PSQL services must bein effect for you to login to the machine  running the database engine  These settings apply whether or not you use a Pervasive Admin user  group     21    Using PSQL    The settings apply to the PSQL Server Engine and to the Workgroup Engine if you are running the  Workgroup Engine as a service  If you are running Workgroup Engine as an application and want to  change it to run as a service  see Running the Workgroup Engine asa Service in Getting Started With  PSQL     Default Setting    By default installation  both the Transactional and Relational services set Log on to Local System  Account     Log on as        Local System account  v Allow service to 
276. the options and parameters     Table 13 License Administrator Command Line Options and Parameters       Options and Parameters Function         lt interpret   i gt   key  Lists the license information for all keys or for the specified key   e Product     The name of the PSQL product  such as Server  Vx Server  or Workgroup   e Product Key     The Product Key associated with the corresponding product license       State     The status of the Product Key  Values are Active  Inactive  Expired  Disabled and  Failed Validation   A license may be disabled if certain hardware configuration items have  changed since the key was applied        Platform     The combination of PSQL product  operating system  and bit architecture to  which the license applies     e License Type     The type of license  such as permanent  temporary or an increase license  for user count  session count  or data in use       User Count     The user count for the specific license  See also Concurrent User License  Model     e Session Count     The session count limit for the specific license       Data In Use GB     The data in use limit in gigabytes for the specific license  See also  Capacity based License Model     e Expiration Date     The date on which a license expires  if applicable  or  n a  if not applicable     Vendor     A unique number identifying the vendor software that installed the license   e Application     A unique number identifying the application to which the license applies          lt
277. ting with Pervasive SQL 2000  fields that allow null values have an additional byte defined at the start  of the field  This byte is the null indicator byte  You can work around this in one of two ways     If you are using SQL statements to create a new table definition  enter the statement SET  TRUENULLCREAT E OFF  For theremainder of your current session  any tables that you create will use  the old record structure without the extra byte for each nullable column     If you do not wish to use SQL statements  you can get the field sizes to align properly by creating all  columns as not nullable     I want to convert my data file version from 9 back to file format version 8  7  or 6  How do I do  this     Ifthe files you wish to convert are serviced by a remote Server or Workgroup engine  you must have  Administrator permissions on the remote system in order to perform these tasks  You must also have a  network drive mapped to the remote data files     In PCC  right click the server name where the data files are located then click Properties  Click  Compatibility and set Create File Version to the file version to which you want to convert  Click OK   Click Yes to restart the engines  These changes result in new files created to bein the version selected     Run the Maintenance utility then click Options then File Information Editor  Click Load Information  and choose the data file that you want to convert  Click Create and specify the name of the new  empty  data file you wan
278. tion   Access License Administrator from the operating system Start menu or Apps screen     This step assumes that License Administrator was installed as part of aPSQL default installation  A  vendor application that uses an embedded database engine may require that you start License  Administrator with different menu commands   The GUI executable is named guilcadm exe      Theutility connects to the local server on which the database engine is running     If the server is not the one you want  select a different server as described in To Select a Server for  License Administration      gt  To Select a Server for License Administration    The database engine must be running on the computer you specify so that License Administrator can  connect to the engine     1    In the Server Name field  type the name of the server for which you want to administer database  licenses     Asan alternative to typing a server name  you may click Browse to display a list of network servers  from which to select  Click on the server for which you want to administer database licenses  then  click OK     Click Connect  or press Enter    License Administrator accesses the specified server to determine the type of license required       Ifyou arenot logged in to the server  a dialog appears to log in to the operating system  not the  database engine      111    License Administration    On thelogin dialog  typethe name of an operating system user for User Name  The user must  have administrative pr
279. tion is tied to your machine s hardware configuration  After you have    authorized a product key on amachine  changes to certain hardware configuration items could  disable the key  If you need to change hardware configuration  deauthorize the key first   Deauthorizing the key disassociates the product key from the unique hardware configuration  After  you completethe hardware configuration changes  you can again authorizethe product key        To Display Remaining Authorizations    Ensure that the server name in the title bar is the correct server for this operation  If not  select a  different server as described in To Select a Server for License Administration     Click Remaining Authorizations   Thenumber of remaining authorizations displays for all product keys     112    License Administration T asks    To Hide Expired Licenses    Ensurethat theserver namein thetitle bar is the server for which you want to hide expired licenses   If not  select a different server as described in To Select a Server for License Administration     Click Hide Expired  if it is not already selected   The list of licenses changes to exclude all expired licenses        Note The Hide Expired checkbox is selected by default and can be selected or cleared as needed         gt  To Deauthorize a Key    1    3       Note Temporary licenses cannot be deauthorized  They expire at the end of their evaluation period        Ensure that the server name in the title bar is the server from which you want t
280. tive user    tim    with password    tim56     you would  enter the following command     btadmin  p tim56 a  tim       Note Users created with btadmin are not related to Linux system users  These users are known only  to the database engine        Logging in as Administrator on any platform     gt  To connect to a remote PSQL v12 server    1 UsetheMonitor utility to connect to a remote server  Refer to the Advanced O perations Guide for a  discussion of this utility     24    Granting Administrative Rights for the Database Engine    2 Enter your operating system user name and password  and click OK     Figure3 Connect to Remote Server Dialog Box    Cancel         The password is encrypted before being sent over the network using a unique and pre defined  encryption key  The PSQL v12 engine unpacks and decrypts the user name and password  and  verifies access  It then returns a status code to the client indicating the success or failure of the  verification     25    Using PSQL       Setting Up ODBC Database Access    This section reviews some conceptual information on setting up ODBC access to your database   Topics covered include the following basic concepts        ODBC Standard   a Servers and Clients   a DataSource Names   a Internal Database Name     Applications Using the MicroKernel Engine       Note ThePSQL Java utilities do not require DSNs  The PSQL Control Center  for example  uses  JDBC not ODBC  DSNsarerequired only if your application uses ODBC to access the da
281. to be met       The key to be repaired must be compatible with the version of the database engine currently  installed       The key to be repaired must be in a    disabled    or a    failed validation    state      A permanent key cannot be in the    active    state      There must be internet access to communicate with the PSQL license server     The allowable number of repairs must not have been exceeded     For a successful repair  the message    key has been repaired    is returned        no option or wrong option          Displays information about the options and parameters           See CLI Tasks for the tasks pertaining to the CLI     109    License Administration       License Administration Tasks    This section explains the tasks that you can perform for license administration  The majority of tasks  involve License Administrator  Some tasks  such astelephone authorization  are accomplished by other  means     License Administrator    GUI Tasks     To Start License Administrator from PSQL Control Center  PCC     To Start License Administrator as a Stand alone Application    To Select a Server for License Administration     To Authorize a Key     To Display Remaining Authorizations     To Hide Expired Licenses     To Deauthorizea Key     TO Repair a Key     To Display License Information     To Determinea Total User Count     TO Refresh the License Information List     To Display Help    CLI Tasks     To Display Information About a Key     To Perform a Validation  
282. tuations Requiring That You Clear PCC Cache    PCC caches certain information to improve efficiency  The cache must be cleared after you install or  upgrade any other products that interact with PCC  Otherwise  the installed or upgraded product does  not appear in PSQL Explorer  For example  if you were to install or upgrade DataExchange  you would    then need to clear the PCC cache     The cache can be cleared only by starting PCC with a parameter from the command line      gt  To clear PCC cache    14 Exit PCC if itis running  select File  gt  Exit      2 Open acommand prompt     3  Changedirectory to the PSQL bin  folder in the PSQL installation directory   For default locations of PSQL files  see Where are the PSQL files installed  in Getting Started With    PSOL     46    An Overview of PSQL Control Center    4 Enterpcc  clean     PCC starts and clears its cache  The newly installed or upgraded products should then appear in the  PSQL Explorer        Note Useof the clean parameter when starting PCC provides no advantage under normal usage  It  is required only if you install or upgrade a plug in product     Editors and Views Within PCC  ThePCC main window offers various editors and views    m PSQL Explorer    a SQL Editor    Grid   a Text     Outline      Table Editor    You can display and work with objects through the different editors and views  Multiple editors of the  same type  such as SQL Editor  can be open at the same time  Each object being edited is represent
283. turned in the order in which they wereinserted   Normal ASCII sorting sequences upper case  letters before lower case  such that the sorting would return as ABC  DEF  Def  abc     Click File  gt  Save or  El before changing pages within Table Editor      gt  To set a column default    The default value is used if you perform an SQL INSERT for a row but do not provide a value for the  column     1    Ensure that the    Columns    page of Table Editor is active  If required  perform the steps for To work  with columns     Click in the D efault cell for the desired column     You can set a default only for applicable data types  If a default is not applicable  the grid cell is  shaded and you will be unable to edit the Default     Delete the existing value  if present   Type the default value you want     135    Table Editor    Thecolumn default can bea scalar function for certain data types        Data Type Scalar Function     Date    now    curdate      See also NOW     and CURDATE      both in SQL Engine Reference        Time    now       curtime      See also NOW     and CURTIME     in SQL Engine Reference        Timestamp   now      See also NOW    in SQL Engine Reference              1 The names are case insensitive  NOW   and now   are equivalent  The parentheses are required  That is  NOW is  invalid but NOW   is valid        5 Click File  gt  Save or  El before changing pages within Table Editor      gt  To set or remove a column as a primary key    Note that you cannot
284. u are working with Linux or the manual states  otherwise  you can enter these items using uppercase   lowercase  or both  For example  you can type MY PROG   myprog  or MYprog    Words appearing in bold include the following  menu names   dialog box names  commands  options  buttons  statements   and so forth     Monospaced font is reserved for words you enter  such as  command syntax     Square brackets enclose optional information  as in   log_name   If information is not enclosed in square brackets   it is required     A vertical bar indicates a choice of information to enter  as in   file name    file name      Angle brackets enclose multiple choices for a required item  as  in  D  lt 5 6 7 gt      Words appearing in italics are variables that you must replace  with appropriate values  as in file name     An ellipsis following information indicates you can repeat the  information more than one time  as in  parameter          The symbol     means one item is defined in terms of another   For example  a   b means the item a is defined in terms of b     xiii    Xiv    chapter       Introducing PSQL E                Understanding PSQL and its Capabilities    These topics cover what PSQL is and what it can do for you       Understanding the PSQL Database M anagement System  a Key Concepts     Understanding the DBM S Products     Using PSQL Documentation   a File System Security    Introducing PSQL       Understanding the PSQL Database Management System    PSQL is a comprehensi
285. u perform on the page     GUI Object    Figure21 Columns Page    Column Name Type Size Precision   Scale   Null    Case   Collate   Default       Columns   Indexes   Foreign Keys   SOL View       Description    Related Information       Column  Name    Specifies the alpha numeric name for the column     To specify a column name    Relational Engine Limits in SQL Engine  Reference    SQL Grammar Support in ODBC Guide    Identifier Restrictions by Identifier Type in  Advanced Operations Guide     Columns Page image        Type    Specifies the data type of the column     PSQL Supported Data Types in SQL  Engine Reference    To set a column data type     Columns Page image        Size    Specifies how many bytes are permitted for the data type  A  shaded cell indicates that size does not apply     To set a column size     Columns Page image        Precision          Specifies the number of significant digits for floating point values     A shaded cell indicates that precision does not apply        To set column precision     Columns Page image        125    Table Editor          GUI Object   Description Related Information  Scale Specifies the number of significant digits that are to the right of   To set a column scale  the decimal point for floating point values  A shaded cell  indicates that scale does not apply   Columns Page image   Null Specifies whether NULL values are allowed for the data type  A   To set a column to allow or disallow nulls    shaded square       indicat
286. upport for Import Data  Export Data  and Export Schema             93  import Data Dialogi  uri raid EER td PR aE td 93  Export Data Dialog  ea ica id as A A E ard Ee 93  Export Schema Dialog           0    o    o    94  4 License Administration             lt                                   97  License M odels and W orking with Keys  License Administration Concepts      aoaaa ee 98  License Mod aca e ar i ara Raines Ben A AE ESETE E dae aa E a Gel wees 98  License Enforcement             da a ai enie a a a i ai  Da D 100  Message LOQgINGs  i  ty sonei bee a dd bb fet ha hE ah 104  License Administrator Graphical User Interface    2    ee 105  GUI Visual Reference  2    a 105  License Administrator Command Line Interface      aao ee   4 108  ESV aa dee Er a o at ad A es Ee Rahal a a da 108  License Administration TakS ou ao a Whe aan LA aa 110  License Administrator    oaoa aa o    110  Notification Viewer    aaa 111  5  Table Editors 3 4  6 44 em r et a Ad  Be oe a I a e a 121  A Tour of PCC TableEditor  Table Editor Concepts    ooo a ee a ee a A ee a a 122  TE 122  Table Editor PES  version a a eee ed EA aw A aw ea 122  Table Editor Graphical User Interface           0    ooo    oe    125  COlUMAS Pagen vor a a A e es 125  Indexes Page tata ee aaa Se 126  Foreign KEYS PIDO or A a Pe bo 126  SOL VIEW Pages  ica dai dai a a 126  Tal Ed RTS a A AS IA Mh ate hte dy ete US Bees 127  AS A or ste Sail   6 se nee God Bee Boe se hina E T E Aone E G4 ge mae S 127  CONUS ASKS  sees 
287. users and passwords to the btpasswd file        ThePervasive Admin option is offered so that you can grant users administrative rights to the database  engine without granting them administrative rights to the operating system where the database engine  resides    Rights Within an Active Directory Environment    You may useone or more Pervasive Admin groups within an Active Directory environment  See Active  Directory Service in Getting Started With PSQL     20    Granting Administrative Rights for the Database Engine    Rights Provided to non Administrative Users  Runtime only access enables a user without administrator level rights to perform such functions as      a extract alist of DSNs     extract a count of DSNs     extract information on a DSN   a extract information on the location of the DBnames configuration file  dbnames cfg     connect to databases     retrieve  update  insert  and delete data  as permitted by database security     Tasks for Granting Administrative Rights  To grant a user administrative rights  follow the instructions for your platform     a Granting Administrative Rights on a Windows Server  a Granting Administrator Rights on Linux  a Loggingin as Administrator on any platform    Granting Administrative Rights on a Windows Server    Users who are members of Pervasive Admin or of Administrators are permitted to perform  administrative tasks on the database engine      gt  To grant a user database administrator rights on a Windows 32 bit Server Pla
288. users are assigned to it     1    2  3  4  5    86    Expand the nodes for the database    Expand the Groups node or Users node   Right click the desired group or user name   Click Delete    Click Yes     To work with groups and users using SQL   Turn security on for the database as explained in General Tasks    In the File menu of PCC  click New  gt  SQL Document  or click  si in the toolbar    The Select D atabase dialog box appears    Click the database in the list for which you want to create a group or user    Click OK    In SQL Editor  create the desired statement for the group or user    Refer to the following statements in SQL Engine Reference       CREATE GROUP    ALTER GROUP    DROP GROUP     CREATE USER     ALTER USER    e DROP USER    GRANT    REVOKE      SET PASSWORD  To execute the statement  click SQL  gt  Executein Text  or click ES  in thetoolbar      Groups  U srs  and Security    Assigning Permissions Tasks     gt  To assign permissions for a group using PSQL Explorer    1  2  3  4    6       Note Permissions on the Database tab override permissions on the Table tab        Expand the nodes for the desired database   Right click the group name under the Groups node then click Properties   Click Permissions in the Properties tree     Click the tab to access permissions for the desired object  database  tables  and columns   stored  procedures  or views  See also Permissions on Views and Stored Proceduresin SQL EngineReference     On the tab  click the option 
289. valid product key  See also Telephone Authorization     2 Atacommand prompt on the machine where the engine is installed  type guipaadm     119    License Administration     gt  To Authorize a Key Using the Command line Phone Authorization Utility    1 Ensure that you havea valid product key  See To Display Information About a Key  If you do not  have a product key  you may obtain onefrom Actian Corporation     2 Atacommand prompt on the machine where the engine is installed  type the utility name  appropriate for your platform      Clipaadm exe  Windows 32 bit      w64clipaadm exe  Windows 64 bit         Clipaadm  Linux 32 bit      Clipaadm64  Linux 64 bit   3 Atthe prompt  enter the product key you want to authorize     ThePSQL Phone Authorization Utility returns an authorization code you will use to complete  teleohone authorization     4 Perform one of the following actions to complete telephone authorization       Ifyou obtained your product key from Actian Corporation  call 1 800 287 4383  U  S  toll free   or 00800 1212 3434  Europe toll free  to complete telephone authorization with Actian  Corporation personnel  The Actian Corporation staff will provide you with an authorization  key data string which you will enter as the final step of authorization       Ifyou did not obtain your product key from Actian Corporation  contact the vendor or original  equipment manufacturer  OEM   from whom you obtained the key  The vendor or OEM  personne  will assist you to complete 
290. ve database management system built around the M icroKernel Database Engine   PSQL offers easy installation  uncomplicated maintenance  and high levels of performance and  reliability     This section explains the product and its components     What is a Database     Loosely defined  a database is simply a collection of data  Generally  the data is structured by dividing it  into sub sets of information that share the same characteristics  Some examples of a database are      m A telephone book    Each entry in the phone book consists of four characteristics  first name  last name  address  and  phone number     m A collection of digital photographs    Each picture on your hard disk has two characteristics  a file name  and the data within the file that  represents the image     m A list of orchards and the fruit grown by each    Each entry in the orchard list might consist of three characteristics  orchard name  address  and date  founded  The related list of fruits might have five characteristics  orchard name  fruit name  fruit  type  McIntosh  Fuji  and so on   fruit price  and a taste rating     In the particular context of this product  a database is a specific  well defined collection of related  information  You can probably find oneor more databases availableon your computer or your network   For example  you may have a database of information related to vendors from whom you purchase  supplies or raw materials  and you probably also have a database containing custom
291. ver or the 32 bit ODBC driver can be used to connect to either PSQL Server 64 bit or  PSQL Server 32 bit     For the PSQL Client  however  the application bitness does haveto match the bitness of the PSQL Client  on the client machine  That is  if you want to use a 64 bit application on the client  the PSQL 64 bit  Client must be installed     203    Command Line Interface U tilities    PSQL allows DSNs to specify three different ODBC driver descriptions  as explained in the following    table     Table18 PSQL ODBC Driver Descriptions for Linux       ODBC Driver Description  in INI Files    Driver Library  Installed With    Behavior for All Products Installed With       Pervasive ODBC Engine  Interface    PSQL Server 64   bit    PSQL Server 32   bit      Installation assigns an ODBC driver in odbc ini for compatibility with  pre existing Engine DSNs    e Connects to a local named database      No longer created by default with dsnadd  the  engdsn option  must be specified     e Visible when viewing    Engine DSNs    in ODBC Administrator  running on a Windows client      For use by 32 bit applications that are already coded to use Engine  DSNs      32 bit Engine DSNs are deprecated on Linux        Pervasive ODBC Client  Interface    PSQL Server 64   bit    PSQL Server 32   bit    PSQL Client 32   bit       Installation assigns an ODBC driver in odbc ini for compatibility with  pre existing Client DSNs      Connects to a local or remote named database or an Engine DSN      For
292. will be asked to enter a password   If a user already exists  then his password is changed as  specified     By default a user   s created without administration permissions  You can usethe a  option to give  administration rights to the user  You can remove this right by using a      To removea user record from the password file  enter     btadmin  r username    Every time the btpasswa file is changed  the previous version is backed up to btpasswa      193    Command Line Interface Utilities    butil    Description    ThePSQL Maintenance Utility  or butil  isa command line utility that performs command file and data  manipulations on a data file     The maintenance utility performs the following file and data manipulations       Starts and stops continuous operations for use in performing server backups      Recovers changes made to a file between the time of the last backup and a system failure    m Imports and exports ASCII  unformatted  and SDF sequential data      Copies data between data files    m Returns MicroKernel Engine version information    Continuous operation is an MicroKernel Engine feature that enables you to back up files while they are    in use by PSQL based applications  Two maintenance commands  startbu and endbu  begin and end  continuous operation on afile or set of files     Synopsis   butil    clone outputFile sourceFile   o lt owne     gt     pagecompresson    pagecompressoff      recordcompresson    recordcompressoff    UIDuname  PWDpword   DBdbnam
293. y Plan Viewer in SQL Engine Reference    m Rebuild  see Converting Data Files in Advanced Operations Guide       Gateway Locator  if PCC isinstalled with PSQL Workgroup   see Gateway Configuration in Getting  Started With PSQL     54       An Overview of PSQL Control Center       Note T hese utilities appear in the Tools menu only on Windows platforms  For both Windows and  Linux platforms  you can add your own custom tools to the Tools menu  Refer to the next section        External Tools    You can add your own software programs to the PCC Tools menu  This provides a convenient way to  start the programs from PCC      gt  To add external tools    1  2  3  4  5    kh O N      On thePCC Window menu  select Preferences  Expand the PSQL nodeif it isnot already expanded   Click External Tools    Click New    Type a name for Tool Label that you want to appear in the Tools menu    Type the path and file name of the program for Tool Location    You can click the ellipsis button E to browse to the file location     Optionally  type any parameters for Tool Parameters that should be passed to the program when the  program starts     Click OK   Click OK  or Apply then OK  to close the Preferences dialog     To set preferences for external tools   On the PCC Window menu  click Preferences  Expand the PSQL nodeif it isnot already expanded   Click External Tools    Click the desired tool in the External Tools list    Perform one of the following actions       Toremovethetool from thelist 
294. y database  use the following at the command line   dbmaint a   d   1   b    1    e   nDbname   ldictpath    ddatapath   The list of commands for dbmaint include     a  add database name  d   delete database name      list all database names    Options include      b   create Bound database    i   create database with Relational Integrity enforced   e  do not create dictionary files for database   NDBName   specify database name     Dictpath   specify dictionary path    dDatapath   specify data path    a  show full data in the DBN ames list    For example  to create DBNameTEST with relational integrity  type        dbmaint a  i  nTEST       Note Unless datapath is specified  the new database is created in the default location   PVSW_ROOT   data  Likewise  if dictpath is not specified  the dictionary is created in the default location          To delete an existing database  use the following at the command line   dbmaint d  nDbname    For example  to delete the newly created database TEST  type    2    Setting up Database Access with PCC    dbmaint d  nTEST         To list all existing databases   dbmaint 1   a     Set up DSN s using the dsnadd utility  See dsnadd     Setting Up Client Access from a Windows Client     gt  To enable client access to a remote PSQL database    1  2    3    4    Access Control Center from the operating system Start menu or Apps screen   In the PSQL Explorer pane  right click Engines then click New then Server     ThePSQL Explorer paneisthecolumn 
295. y use of product keys  which you manage using the License  Administrator utility  The utility allows you to authorize and deauthorize keys and view license  information  It has both a graphical and command line interface  You authorize a key for one of two  purposes     a Authorize a Product    Increase User Count or Data In Use    Authorize a Product    Product authorization is a key validation process that associates certain machine information with the  license for a product  called the    product key     This association results in a unique installation  identification that ensures the copy of software is legitimate and on the appropriate machine     When you authorizea product key  the unique installation ID issent to Actian Corporation to verify the  authenticity of the key and ensureit is not being used for multiple installations  This process authorizes  the product for use  When the product key is authorized or deauthorized  your remaining authorizations  are displayed     Note that after you have authorized a product key on a machine  certain changes to the machine can  disable the key  If you need to make changes to the machine  deauthorize the key first  Doing so  disassociates the product key from its uniqueinstallation ID  After you complete the hardware  configuration changes  you can again authorize the product key     100    License Administration Concepts    Authorization Access Through A Proxy Server    If you are using a proxy server  you need to configure
296. you attempt to save the table   After you deletethel DENTITY or SMALLIDENTITY column from thelist  you may then savethetable     136    Ya    4    AS    Table Editor Tasks    Ensure that the    Indexes    page of Table Editor is active  If required  perform the steps for To work  with indexes     Click Add   The New Index dialog displays   Type the name of the new index and click OK        Tip For a list of database object lengths and invalid characters  see Identifier Restrictions by  Identifier Type in Advanced Operations Guide        The new index appears in the Indexes list and the Index Segment Details display  N ote that the first  column is populated into the Columns list        Note New indexes are created by default as Normal        Index Editor    Indexes Index Segment Details    index _01    Ounique Partial  Normal    v  Allow Modifications                Columns SortOrder    Student_ID   Ascending  Amount_Paid          In the Columns list  select the Column to designate for the Index or Index Segment        Caution  ndexes must have at least one Column designated  If you do not select a Column for the  Index  the first column remains selected        Thedefault sort order is Ascending  If you need a descending sort order  select Descending from the  Sort Order list for the Column you want changed        Note Some data types  such as LON GVARBINARY  cannot be used for an index  Columns with such  data types are not valid choices        Continue selecting columns fro
297. ystem  and bit  architecture to which the license applies   e License Type     The type of license  such as permanent  temporary or an  increase license for user count  session count  or data in use     User Count     The user count for the specific license   e Session Count     The session count limit for the specific license     Data In Use GB     The data in use limit in gigabytes for the specific license     Expiration Date     The date on which a license expires  if applicable  or  n a   if not applicable     Vendor     A unique number identifying the vendor software that installed the  license     Application     A unique number identifying the application to which the license  applies    Hide Hides all expired licenses in the list of licenses for the current session of License   To Hide Expired Licenses   Expired Administrator  This checkbox is selected by default     Return to GUI Dialog  image    Deauthorize   Deauthorizes the selected key from the specified server  If the selected keyisa   To Deauthorize a Key  permanent key  also deauthorizes all increase keys  user count  session count     data in use  associated with the permanent key  oe to GUI Dialog   image  This button is enabled when a Product name is selected in the License  Information list   Repair Repairs  deauthorizes  and authorizes the selected key on the specified server    Repair    To Repair a Key     Return to GUI Dialog  image        License Administrator Graphical U ser Interface       GUI Objec
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
Novell eDirectory 8.8 What`s New Guide  PDF資料 - 計測器・分析機器のレンタル  Manuel d`utilisation  LC-Power PRO-935W computer case  SICStus Prolog User`s Manual  télécharger - dsl  Manuale-uso-manutenzione-miele    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file